Home

EPP Installation Tutorial User Manual 20100308 v1

1. All content is organized in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organize your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 8 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 82 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 83 Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customized to specific types of projects
2. Related topics Method Content Categories Create Method Content Create a Method Plug in Variability Associations Create Guidance 5 6 Method Content Packages A method content package is a container for method content elements Tasks Roles Work Products and Guidance Elements are organised in method content packages to structure a large amount of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse Method elements from one content package can reuse elements from other content packages by defining a link between them For example a work product defined in one content package can be used as an input for tasks defined in another content package ensuring that no redundant definitions of the same elements are required In addition maintenance of method content is greatly improved as changes can be performed in only one place 13 Method content and process elements are organised into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of category standard and custom 14 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 15 Guidance provides information about how to perform a role how to create a work product how to perform your task and so on 8 Mar 10 lt Copyri
3. 7 4 6 Browsing Variability Relationships You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements The complete hierarchy of variability associations for an element can be displayed graphically To browse variability relationships 1 Switch to the Authoring perspective if you are not already using it 2 Right click any task icon in the Library then click Open via variability elements A window will be displayed which shows the hierarchy of content 137 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 138 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements 13 A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 14 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements fro
4. 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 147 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 12 Click the Categories tab A role can be included in one or more role sets and any number of custom categories Open the appropriate Select window by clicking Add next to the category lists You can remove role sets or custom categories by selecting them in the appropriate box and then clicking Remove 13 Click the Preview tab to view the newly created role and then save by closing the editor Related topics Method Plug in Configuration View Rich Text Editor Create Method Content Method Content Create a Task Create a Work Product Create Guidance Variability 7 1 2 Create a Task A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a specific role The granularity of a task is generally a few hours to a few days and usually affects one or a small number of work products To create a new task 14 Expand the Content Package in which you want to create the task 15 Right click Tasks and select New gt Task The task editor opens with the Description tab as the default 16 In the Name field type a unique name for your task The task name is the file name that appears in the Library View 6 Al
5. EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Export XML 10 3 Export a Library Configuration You can export a library using a method configuration and all its method plug ins or just export one or more method configuration specifications To create a method configuration see Creating New Method Configurations and then use the procedure described below to export this configuration as a method library When exporting method configurations all referenced method plug ins in the selected configuration will be included in the export The export will scan all elements of the method configuration and will also export all resource files including images documents and templates Tip You could use this export to clean your library from unused resource files by creating a method configuration that includes all your plug ins and then exporting As a result all unused resource files will not be exported In addition to exporting the method configuration you could simply export a method configuration specification file that you want to share with other users In other words you could export a file that defines a configuration but does not contain the elements that are part of the configuration itself To export a library 1 Click File gt t Export 2 Select Library Configuration and click Next 3 Select the type of library configuration to export Export a method configuration and all its met
6. 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 150 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Create a Work Product Create Guidance Elements 7 1 3 Create a Work Product A work product is a term that is used to describe task inputs and outputs There are three types of work products Artefacts An artefact is a tangible work product that is consumed produced or modified by one or more tasks Artefacts may be composed of other artefacts Outcomes An outcome is an intangible work product that may be a result or state It may also be used to describe work products that are not formally defined Deliverables A deliverable is a collection of work products usually artefacts used to define typical or recommended content in the form of work products packaged for delivery To create a work product 1 Expand the Content Package in which you want to create the task 2 Right click Work Products and select one of the following work product types New gt Artefact m New gt Outcome New gt Deliverable The Work Product editor for the work product type that you chose opens and has the Description tab set as the default 3 Inthe Name field type a unique name for your work product The work product name is the name that appears i
7. EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 10 Main description My extended role description Use the Variability type menu to select Extends then click Select The Select Dialog Roles window opens Select the developer role and click OK This is now the base role extended by our customisation Save the new role by closing the editor panel Update the configuration to include the new content package by doing the following a Double click the my basic contiguration icon in the Library view panel The configuration editor panel opens b Click the Plug in and Package Selection tab c Expand my_plug in gt Method Content gt Content Packages d If they are checked clear contribution_test and my_content_package We do this to make sure that no contributions are coming from other content packages e Make sure that extends_testis checked f Close and save the changes to the configuration Switch to the Browsing perspective Make sure that you are using my basic configuration In the Configuration view select Extends OpenUp Developer in the Uncategorised Roles folder under the Role Sets folder You will see in the HTML page that content entered in the extending role has been replaced whereas content not provided has been inherited from the base artefact Note that the extended role Developer remains unchanged File Edit Search Configuration Window Help Cue my basic configuration x Fi OY iO E
8. The Library view will display the plug ins in a flat and hierarchical presentation as shown here Flat Representation Hierarchical Presentation Library x O kibazo E S E eree teamA e teamA domainX WP1 8 domainx teamA domainX WP2 we WPI b teamB core s WP2 4 teamB tools TA core 3 teamB tools TB H teamB Qa Configurations amp tools a TA 3 TB core s Configurations When using the Flat presentation the highest level library content unit is the Method Plug in gt The flat presentation displays all the plug ins in alphabetical order In the Hierarchical presentation of the Library view the highest level library content unit is called a logical package with the icon The logical packages are groupings of method plug ins The logical packages are created simply by using dots in the method plug in names The six method plug ins are listed in the Hierarchical presentation according to the naming structure created with the dots in the name If you have many plug ins in your method library you can switch the Method Plug in presentation to hierarchical To switch between Flat and Hierarchical presentations click the triangle down arrow dropdown menu v in the Library tool bar and select Method Plug in Presentation then choose Flat or Hierarchical vop amp Show Presentation Names Link with Editor Me
9. 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 87 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Pmyo mA E System Vuela Raquiraments Requirements Requirements eS Use Glossary Case E Glossary Uae Use Case Model You can change the layout of the diagram but you cannot add or remove any elements from the diagram 10 Close the diagram that you opened 11 In the Work Breakdown Structure right click the Requirements activity and click Diagrams gt Open Work Product Dependency Diagram The work products used in the activity are automatically added to the diagram Using the Work Product Dependency tool add a dependency link between two work products This indicates that the work product at the arrow end of the link is dependent on the other work product that is the other work product needs to be created in order to create the second work product 12 Click the Work Product Descriptor tool in the palette and add a new work product descriptor to the diagram 13 Switch back to the delivery process and open the Work Product Usage view Notice the new work product in the Requirements activity 14 After you have edited a diagram you can choose to include it or exclude it when publishing the process in a configuration In the Work
10. Related topics 211 Process Management Create Capability Patterns Create Delivery Processes Capability Patterns Reuse Use of Descriptors in Processes Create Method Content Elements Create Guidance Elements 9 9 Apply Process to Method Synchronisation Changes to information in method elements can be updated in related process elements through a mechanism called Synchronisation The Synchronised with source option is selected by default To change this behaviour Change the synchronisation option 1 Inthe Process editor click the Work Breakdown Structure tab 2 Right click a task and click Show Properties View 3 Inthe Properties view panel click the General tab 4 Near the bottom of this panel there is a checkbox labelled Synchronised with source You can check or clear this box to enable or disable automatic 211 A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 218 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution
11. Role set grouping T Tool Custom Category Guidance Practice Discipline Discipline Guidance Reference Workflow eas el Task Custom category Discipline Discipline grouping Guidance Practice Discipline Grouping Discipline Custom category Domain Domain Guidance Work product Custom category Domain Guidance Practice Role Set Guidance Role Custom category Guidance Practice Guidance Practice Role Set Grouping Role Set Custom Category Tool Guidance Tool mentor Custom category Tools 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 175 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Element Ra aen Associated element Tools Guidance Work Product Work Product Kind a lt Custom category Guidance Practice l Work Product kind Related topics Method Content Variability Browsing Variability Relationships Contributes Variability Extends Variability Replaces Variability Extends and Replaces Variability 8
12. lt Outdent selected text Find and replace text The Find Replace window opens Type the text that you want to find in the Find field and if you are replacing that text type the replacement text in the Replace with field You can search forward or backward and specify whether you want your search to be case sensitive or search for parts of words This functionality may be limited on Linux systems Add or create hyperlinks For more information about hyperlinks see Add a Reference or Hyperlink Add an image The Add Image window opens Browse for the image that you want to add and click OK F Add a table The Add Table window opens Specify the table parameters and click OK Clean HTML There are three options when using the Clean HTML toolbar button Default Clean a Clean MS HTML m Clean Word 2000 HTML Click the button to use the first option Default Clean Use the drop down arrow to select the other two options Use Clean MS HTML for cleaning HTML that has been pasted from Microsoft Word Use Clean Word 2000 HTML only for cleaning up HTML that has been pasted from Microsoft Word 2000 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 163 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Add a Reference or H
13. Comments Create a new custom category The plugin xmi file is modified Update the brief description for a method content element task role work product guidance custom categories standard category or process Capability pattern or delivery process The plugin xmi file is modified Assign a relationship to an element such as adding guidance tool mentors input or output work product responsible role performing role and so on The plugin xmi file is modified Categorise an element by assigning it to a domain work product kind role set or discipline The plugin xmi file is modified Assigning variability to an element by making it a contributor extension or replacement for another element a The plugin xmi file is modified Assigning a shape or node icon The plugin xmi file is modified Add or change descriptive text for a process not the brief description The content xmi file is modified Update the brief description for an activity in a process Capability pattern or delivery process a The model xmi file is modified Modify or create a diagram for a process a The model xmi file is modified Update the name or presentation name of an activity a The model xmi file is modified Set or update the entry or exit state of a work product a The model xmi file is modified 8 Mar 10
14. Copy from an HTML source such as a published Web site Tip You can use the Rich Text Editor to edit or enter the text for any field that has the Rich Text Editor icon l Click the icon to access the Rich Text Editor Click the icon again to close the Rich Text Editor For more information about the editor see Rich Text Editor 20 Complete the other task specific fields in Detail Information as needed For more information about creating variability see Variability 21 Click the Steps tab The Steps Editor opens A task can have a series of steps that describe how to perform that task With the Step Editor you can Create a new step m Click Add m Give the step a name in the Name field Describe the step in the Description field Remove a step m Select the step to remove in the Steps field m Click Delete Move a step up the list Select the step that you want to move up Click Up Move a step down the list Select the step that you want to move down Click Down The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organized into sets of method plug ins and configurations The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and al
15. Page 39 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Bi Library 2 ep oo 8 core 8 practice 8 process 8 openup base B Method Content a Processes fa Capability Patterns l Management es construction_phase_iteration S elaboration_phase_iteration S inception_phase_iteration S transition_phase_iteration iS Technical fa Delivery Processes 8 publish L Configurations Capability patterns are represented by this icon K Note that not all plug ins have capability patterns Double click on one of the capability patterns The panel on the right side of the window shows the capability pattern editor and the properties view You can find out more about these in the Working with Processes tutorial 4 1 3 Browse Method Content The goal of this exercise is to examine method content in a library using the Browsing perspective To browse method content in the browsing perspective 1 Select publish openup in the current configuration drop down list in the main menu bar publish openup v 2 Select the Browsing perspective The Configuration view is displayed in the left hand panel 3 To view a task expand the tree nodes in the Configuration panel by clicking on the symbols Expand Disciplines gt Architecture The Configu
16. This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 5 Click Add and select the method content elements and processes that you want to associate and present with your practice The order in which the elements are listed is relevant in respect to the presentation rules defined above 6 Click OK and Save The new element you added to your practice is now displayed in the practice in the Configuration view Related topics Creating Guidance Elements Guidance Pelgtiananni Configuration View Method Configurations 7 2 3 Glossary Entries You can create a term definition in the same way as other types of guidance in a content package Glossary entries are a type of guidance called term definition If a content package is used in a configuration all glossary elements contained in that package will be combined with terms contained in other packages of that configuration The glossary in the published site will include these terms merged together from all packages and sorted alphabetically You can preview the glossary in the Configuration view by expanding Guidance gt Term Definitions When a content package is removed from a configuration all term definition elements in that package are removed from the configuration and they are therefore no longer in the Configuration view
17. This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer used for creating processes and for publication by defining which elements are published or not published on the Web site in HTML format A method configuration consists of the components A description of the configuration A selection from the set of plug ins and packages of the elements that will be part of the configuration A selection of categories for the categorised elements that will be added to the set of elements of the configuration in addition to the elements of the selected plug ins and packages A selection of categories of which categorised elements are subtracted from the set of elements of the configuration defined earlier A selection of views to be published in the Web site In a method configuration you are able to select and deselect content packages process and categories available in the method library s set of plug ins The selections that you make help determine the content of your published Web site A configuration is given a name and then saved so that it can be changed and republished later Before creating a method configuration assess your needs and goals for the configuration There are two ways to create a method configuration Create a new method configuration Create a method configuration by co
18. To prototype the system s user interface in an attempt to validate the user interface L gt design against the functional and usability requirements Disciplines Development Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections Relationships Roles Primary Performer Additional Performers e My Ul Designer Inputs Mandatory Optional e My Navigation Map e None Outputs e My Ul Prototype Back to top Expand All Steps Collapse All Steps Design the user interface prototype Implement the user interface prototype Back to top Description Steps Roles Work Products Guidance Categories Preview 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 54 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 13 Save your work by closing the task editor panel 4 2 7 Work with Steps The goal of this exercise is to use the Step Editor which is part of the Task Editor When you create a task you can define a series of steps that detail how to perform the task Using the Step Editor you can add new steps change the sequence of steps and delete steps To add steps in a task 1 Double click my_design_user_interface 2 Click the Steps tab 3 Create a new step a Click Add b Enter a name for the new step in the Steps box c Enter a Description yo
19. milidh 5 d abrd wat hts i EYA amp all epl_peactic ee Toshia Eleaf Fa Cylinder openup Rectangle Types E my pugin X Polygon p Method Canter S Line gt Processes be Capability F Deli Requremenis Requeemems a Delivery Pri Giaa sag qen oN My DP v gt G e R Canfigurations lise SPER 9 Dss be Ghseyy sid gt te Configure rac ng N Case iny Dasicconfiguire Madd E Disciplines z 8 Domains OR Work Product Ki Properties lt pn US Role Sets Tools rocesses Fonts and Colors One Appearance uses i Custom Categor Tahoma wio a a Guidance Rulers amp Grid i Advanved e Le ka sba lt gt 6 The diagram is generated automatically and it shows the tasks within the selected activity The tasks are arranged by the responsible role that performs them Activity detail diagrams also show the mandatory input and output work products for each task 7 Ifyou use generated diagrams make sure that you do not have out of date activity detail diagrams To remove old diagrams right click in the diagram editor to open the menu and select Delete Diagram 718 You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 719 The help files say Activity detail diagrams are generated if you select the Publish activity detail diagrams that have not bee
20. 5 Expand the Custom Categories node in the Configuration view and locate the views associated with this configuration 6 At the bottom of the Configuration editor panei select the Views tab File Edit Search Configuration Window Help ge i an ae ogor mili a OP ite T Authoring j Library 5a E B my basic configuration 1 0 amp Processes jm jil S Capability Patterns fe Delivery Processes Published Navigation Views amp My DP Specify the views that will be induded when this Configurations configuration is published To create a view click Add g my scat figuration on View to select any standard or custom category within NA the configuration The selected category will represent ESN the view and the category s sub categories and content elements will represent the view s tree elements Configuration my basic configuration B 5 publish all ent _practices E pitieopeen aera Jo Nn navigation_view_generic default liga Introduction to OpenUP w 8 Getting Started i f Delivery Processes a Practices Disciplines amp Roles SB Domains S S Work Products s 3 Work Product Kinds amp Tasks amp CS Role Sets Guidance E4 Tools Tools l Processes Release Info a Custom Categories 2 Guidance El Configuration 3 SO my basic configuration Properties 2 E Problems _ D epf composer Training y basic
21. Arrange All gt 3 al i Align gt gt Order gt 7 Auto Size Make Same Size gt Filters gt 2 Bal oj View gt my_j Zoom gt gt BAM Oe iia a sey hee eee T r iaa 8 When you modify a diagram a symbol is displayed left to the name of the diagram tab indicating that it needs to be saved There are four ways to save it m Close the diagram tool and click Yes in response to the question about saving the changes m Click one of the disk icons all or current in the toolbar Use the shortcut Ctrl s Click File gt Save 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 224 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Diagram editor tools The diagram editor palette has several tools for creating diagrams Palette Select Use this tool to select elements or portions of your gt Select diagram for manipulation using the drawing aids Zoom m Zoom Use this tool to zoom in and zoom out your diagram Note x Left click to zoom in Shift Left click to zoom out and Flows drag to zoom to a selection 7 Control Flow Note and Note Attachment Use this tool to add notes to Nodes the diagram and link the notes to other diagram elements Adivity Partition Text Use this tool to add your
22. Author Copyright KeyWord Author See Author Suppressing index generation By default published Web sites include an index however this feature can be cleared before publishing If the check box Include index page is cleared the published site will not include this feature This check box is one of the publishing options in Publish Method Configuration Configuration file The KeyWordMap application takes a number of parameters as input Copyright See Copyright These parameters are specified in a configuration file Each row in the configuration file defines one parameter The order of the rows does not matter Each part of a row is separated with a tab character t The name of the parameters is not case sensitive Space characters to the left or right of an item will be removed Parameter Setting Description wwwroot d work rup This is the top directory of the directory structure to traverse Normally this is the top directory of the site This parameter is mandatory relativepath Defines the relative path from where the result of this application is written to the files it refers to If the result is written to a directory one level below the top of the site this parameter has the value This parameter is mandatory mainresultfile index index htm If this parameter and the parameter indexresultfile is se t a frameset is generated into this file This is useful when the s
23. EPF Practices 1 5 0 4 Library gt epf_practices_library 1 5 0 4 20091008 zip Download the two zip files Extracting the zip files results in two folders epf practices and epf_practices_published The ep practices library is an example of already created content in modifiable source format published as EPF method plug ins which can be edited once they have been loaded in the EPF Composer and which can subsequently be published The already provided published version is a static html website set of web pages that can be installed on any computer even those that do not run the EPF Composer Therefore if you only want to use the out of the box content as is you can simply unzip the published zip and run index htm in your favourite browser and you will be able to navigate the already published content We recommend that you move the two folders under the ep composer folder To install the epf practice libraries start the EPF composer program by double clicking on epf exe again The go to menu File gt Open gt Method Library Click Browse and navigate to the epf practices folder placed under the epfcomposer folder and click OK The file that the programme is looking for is named ibrary xm i which it finds in the epf_practices folder Then the Copy Library dialogue window pops up and tells you The library you are opening is a default library suppli
24. When the Publish glossary option in the Publish Method Configuration wizard is selected all term definitions in the configuration will be provided in the glossary used in the published site If this option is cleared before publishing the published site will not provide a glossary feature Create Glossary Entries To create a glossary entry 1 In the Library view right click a Guidance element and select New gt Term Definition The Guidance editor panel opens 107 Guidance provides information about how to perform a role how to create a work product how to perform your task and so on 108 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 1 A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and method packages in a method library 110 Guidance is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most Method and Process elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements 11 You can create a term definition in the same way as other types of guidance in a content package 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 160 of 275 This
25. d Under the Detail Information tab enter a purpose for this work product in the Purpose field 3 The new work product should look similar to this B my_naymap Work Product Artifact my_naymap s v General Information Provide general information about this artifact Name my_naymap Presentation name My Navigation Map Brief description The Navigation Map expresses the structure of the user interface elements in the system along with their potential A navigation pathways v Detail Information Provide detailed information about this artifact a Purpose There is one Navigation Map per system The purpose of the Navigation Map is to express the A principal user interface paths through the system These are the main pathways through the on i Main description Key considerations Er 4 Click the Preview tab to view the new work product 5 Save the new artefact 6 Now create another artefact Repeat the above steps using the following information Artefact Name my_user_interface_prototype Presentation name My UI Prototype Brief description A user interface prototype is an example of the user interface that is built to explore or validate the user interface design Purpose To provide a realistic experience of the look and feel of a user interface You should now have two new work products in my_content_package 8 Mar 10 lt
26. eclipse Clicking on the arrow in the top right corner brings you directly to the Workbench If you want to go back to the Welcome screen go the menu item Help and select Welcome The workbench screen is empty 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 9 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 6 EPF Workbench Screen GEPF Composer Jogy Fle Edit Search Configuration Window Help Ca i ee Bia Authoring Library Bao Configuration ie After these steps the application is ready for use In most cases you will however download content created by others in order to reuse the content This is explained in the next chapter 1 3 Configuration After installation you should also pay attention to default folders used by EPF Composer Select Windows gt Preferences In the preference dialogue window expand Method and click on Authoring and on Publishing Browsing After installation they will point to folders C Documents and Settings User EPF Method Libraries C Documents and Settings User EPF Publish Note Replace User with your computer login user name You can create similar folders elsewhere for example in the epf composer folder and make the application point to these folders in
27. file and place them in the epf composer folder Double click on index htm which will open the Internet browser and you will be able to navigate the already published content 2 2 4 Other Libraries For the other libraries follow the same steps On the EPF Downloads page see Figure 1 the following libraries are available for downloading m Scrum XP MAM Method Authoring Method for Eclipse Practices Library EPL 2 3 Other Download Sites Already created method content can be downloaded from different sites Currently the primary example is the TOGAF 9 Method Plug in 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 16 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer TOGAF There is a TOGAF 9 Method Plug in which can be found at http www opengroup org architecture togaf epf_intro html Installation of a plug in is different from the installation of a library Installation Once you have downloaded the TOGAF_9_Final_EPF _Export zip file the next step is to extract the zip file The result is a folder and you can change its name We called the folder TOGAF_Export for example We suggest you place the folder under the epf composer folder Figure 11 Create new Method Library Eclipse Process Framework Compos
28. Comments Multiple dates 14 versions Drafts Bjorn Tuft 8 Mar 2010 1 Released Bjorn Tuft Section reviewed by GS 14 3 Author and Reviewers Role Name Initials Contact Info Author Bjorn Tuft BT bjorn tuft gmail com Reviewer Gerhard Schneider GS gerhard schneider innoreq com 14 4 Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution Copyright Statement This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 275 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution
29. Composer b If any of the folder elements contain less than or three elements no folder will be created instead the elements will be published in a flat list in the same position as the folder 1e 2 Configuration 3 amp 7 7 publish all_epf_practices iy Disciplines Domains Work Product Kinds C Role Sets C4 Tools lS Processes a Custom Categories fe Guidance E Checklists Concepts gt Examples z P Practices dp Change Management P Concurrent Testing dp Continuous Integration How to Adopt the Evolutionary Architecture Practice S Key Concepts B Architecture Notebook D Outline the Architecture D Refine the Architecture Guidance op Evolutionary Design i op Iterative Development How to Adopt the Iterative Development Practice Key Concepts Work Products B Tasks Guidance E op Risk Yalue Lifecycle dp Shared Vision E dp Test Driven Development ap Two Level Project Planning ES op Use Case Driven Development E op Whole Team v E E E oe Te UE To create practice guidance elements 1 Expand the Content Package in which you want to create your guidance 2 Right click Guidance and select New gt Practice from the context menu 3 Document your practice using the Description tab 4 Select the References tab 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 159 of 275
30. Configuration panel It is in the Role Sets gt Basic Roles folder You should see the text that you included in the contributing role appended to the existing brief description of this role at the top of the page This is how contributing variability works it appends text to the base element File Edit Search Configuration Window Help Beo my basic configuration a Y D FY E Browsing 8 Configuration 3 A A Content 4m m seo my basic configuration amp Vv E Disciplines Ce Domains 5 GE Work Product Kinds This role is responsible for defining the software architecture which o8 Uncategorized includes making the key technical decisions that constrain the C Role Sets overall design and implementation of the system 3 Basic Roles amp analyst Contributing brief description text amp Any Role Role Sets Basic Roles Architect Developer Expand All Sections Hl Collapse All Sections Project Manager amp Stakeholder Tester mia y peson gt D a My UI Designer Fe A performs Outline the Refine the cB Uncategorized Roles Q Architecture Architecture Tools tl Processes Architect ee m l Custom Categories Guidance Architecture Notebook lt gt Note The Configuration view resolves variability relationships between related plug ins in a configuration and shows the results as they will be published in a published Web site 4 3 3
31. Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 50 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Library 23 Ep D 8 core E practice E process E publish my_plug in BA Method Content Content Packages BA my_content_package CS Roles ID Tasks Work Products E my_navmap B my_user_interface_prototype Guidance CS Standard Categories ts Custom Categories F lS Processes amp Configurations 4 2 5 Create a Role The goal of this exercise is to create a new role in my_plug in To create a role 1 2 9 Under my_content_package right click Roles and select New gt Role The role editor is displayed Enter the following information 3 Inthe Name field enter my_user_interface_designer 4 Inthe Presentation name field enter My UI Designer 5 Enter a description in the Brief description field At the bottom of the window click the Work Products tab You can now specify work products for which this role is responsible Click Add This opens a selection list from which you can select work products to add to your role Make this new role responsible for the two work products that we just created my_navmap and my_user_interface_prototype After selecting the work products click OK The work products that
32. ES Role Sets z Tools Custom Categories lg Processes 3 Capability Patterns a Delivery Processes a5 Configurations Unlike custom categories standard categories by definition are linked to specific types of method content There are standard categories for grouping tasks into disciplines roles into role sets and work products into domains The categories can only be assigned to the specified types of method content for example disciplines can only contain tasks Method Standard Content _ Categories D amp Scrption A discipline is a collection of tasks that are related to a major Tasks Disciplines area of concern within the overall IT environment You can organise disciplines by using discipline groupings A domain is a logical hierarchy of related work products that are grouped together based on timing resources or relationship Domain ome A domain categorises many work products but a work product Work can only belong to one domain You can divide domains into Products sub domains A work product can have many work product kinds For Work instance you might want to have a series of work product Product kinds that correspond to the overall intent of work products Kinds such as specification plan or model A role set is used to group roles with certain commonalities a For example you can set up a role set named Analyst to group together roles such as Business P
33. Guidance into the custom category Remember You can select multiple items by using Shift or Control key 8 Click OK To assign a standard category 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view panel for relevant method plug in and expand the Method Content Standard Categories and the relevant standard category type folder 3 Double click the standard category that you want to assign to method content elements or right click the same category and select Edit The custom category editor opens 4 Click the tab related to the type of method content that the standard category can contain i e Task tab for the Discipline category Work Products tab for the Domains category and for the Work Product Kinds category and so forth 5 Click the Assign button to the right The Select Dialog Method content tasks work products etc window opens 6 If you have previously created content add your Roles Work Products Artefacts Deliverables Outcomes Tasks and Guidance into the standard category Remember You can select multiple items by using Shift or Control key 7 Click OK 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 192 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Modify C
34. Method Content Variability 1 5 1 Create Copyright Notice Copyright notices are stored as supporting material elements When you create a new method plug in you should also create a supporting materials guidance element with the appropriate copyright information You can then reference this element from the plug in s Copyright field To create copyright notice in new method plug ins 1 In the Library view panel use the tree browser to locate the method plug in that you want to work on and double click to open the editor 2 Under Version Information section click Select to the right of the Copyright field 3 Select the appropriate copyright element and click OK 4 Close the method plug in editor and save your changes Related topics Copyright Notices 147 Sometimes elements in your method plug in may require a different copyright than the default for the plug in You can override the default copyright 148 Sometimes elements in your method plug in may require a different copyright than the default for the plug in You can override the default copyright 19 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved
35. Output From KI T a lal e Implement Solution x 4 3 7 Extend a Task The goal of this exercise is to extend a base method content associated with a task by using Extends variability 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 74 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To extend a task 1 Switch back to the Authoring perspective 2 Create a new task in the extends_test content package 3 Use these attributes for the new task Name my_extends_design_solution Presentation name Extends Design Solution Brief description Extends Task Brief Description 4 Use the Variability type menu to select Extends then click Select The Select Dialog Tasks window opens 5 Select design_solution to be the base task Click OK to close the selection window 6 Click the Steps tab and add two new steps Extend Step 1 Extend Step 2 7 Click the Roles tab and add the role that we created in Exercise 4 my_extends_developer as the Primary Performer 8 Click the Work Products tab and add my_extends_design as an output 9 Click the Guidance tab and add a guidance You can pick anyone that you want here 10 Click the Categories tab to add the new task to an appropriate
36. Page 45 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The goal of this exercise is to perform some simple management tasks specifically adding and removing guidance Create a Standard Category The goal of this exercise is to create a new standard category m Add a Method Plug in to a Configuration The goal of this exercise is to include the method plug in created earlier to a copy of an existing configuration 4 2 1 Concepts This page describes the basic concepts that are required to complete this tutorial Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Method content is always separated from its application in processes There are four main types of method content elements Task how to perform the work Role who performs the work Work Product what is produced such as artefact deliverable or outcome m Guidance such as checklist concept example guideline estimation consideration practice report reusable asset roadmap supporting material template term definition tool mentor or white paper These basic elements are the building blocks from which processes are composed A Process Engineer typically authors these eleme
37. QOpenUP The Best of Two Worlds 3 1 EPF Composer Overview Welcome to the Eclipse Process Framework EPF Composer The EPF Composer is a is a free open source tool platform for enterprise architects programme managers process engineers project leads and project managers to implement deploy and maintain processes for organisations or individual projects 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 25 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Typically two key problems need to be addressed to deploy new processes successfully 1 First teams need to be educated on the methods applicable to the roles for which they are responsible Second teams need to understand how to apply these methods throughout a change management and development lifecycle That is they need to define or select a process and they need a clear understanding of how the different tasks relate to each other To that end EPF Composer serves two main purposes First to provide a knowledge base of intellectual capital that you can browse manage and deploy EPF Composer is designed to be a content management system and publishing application that provides a common management structure and look and feel for all content rather than being just a document manag
38. Select the method plug ins content packages and processes that will be included in this configuration Re calculate errors whenever configuration is changed li taal problem view options O Re calculate errors only when Refresh button is clicked and when saving Hide errors C Hide warnings E Hide infos Content E Add these Categories H t mae 2 C amp core i V7 amp 8 practice 7 amp practice 88 process C amp publish E amp publish E S my_plug in v l gt Description Plug in and Package Selection Views 8 Close the editor and save the changes 9 Change the current configuration to my basic configuration in the configuration selection box in the main menu bar 10 Switch to the Browsing perspective and look for your content in the Configuration view You should see My Design role set You should also see your new work products in the Uncategorised folder under Work Product Kinds 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 63 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 Configuration x a ie o my basic configuration a ce Domains G8 Work Product Kinds eS Uncategorized Project Definition and Scope Project Risk Project Status Project Work Software Design Software
39. This window is part of the Publish Method Configuration wizard The default setting is http www published_website com feedback This address must be changed before publishing A simple e mail address uses syntax such as mailto xyz eclipse org Additional syntax can be used to embellish the feedback e mail Those features are shown in the following table Table 8 Table 1 Feedback Syntax Feature Syntax Send message to multiple recipients comma separating email 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 183 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Feature Syntax addresses Specify the Subject field subject Subject Text Send message using the Copy To or CC field Send message using the Blind Copy To or 9 ae BCC field amp bcc id internet node amp cc id internet node Example Feedback URL mailto feedback your_company org subject Process Configuration amp cc process_eng your_company org Note Use only one Question mark when creating any entry beyond e mail address See example above If the subject parameter is not included it will be automatically generated based on the page with the feedback button Related topics Publish Configuration 8
40. configuration xmi Description Piug in and Package Selection vests 7 The only view shown is the navigation_view_generic This view resides in the method plug in called core default nav_view base under the Method Content gt Custom Category node When we earlier copied and pasted the method configuration publish openup and named the copy my basic configuration this view was inherited 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 91 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 Click on Add View and the Select Dialog Select Categories pops up with Method Element Type Custom Category selected Select Management Practices for example Method Flement Type Custom Categories Name patterns matching names will be showr Patterns are separated by comma where any string any character Ga Custom Categories X Do NOT Publish Guidance 6 My Custom Category Navigalice Building Blocks lt gt Tasks m View Tabs tor OpentIP SP EPF Practices E Distiplines 4 Domains L C Role Sets_ Briet Description 9 The view tab now contains two views navigation views the navigation_view_generic and the the management_practice_Iist my b asic co nf figur rat
41. content will also be accessible with some exceptions noted below All diagrams and icons have HTML ALT attributes which means they have text based descriptions that can be recognised and spoken by text to speech converters including speech enabled web browsers Obviously there is less information contained in the textual descriptions than in the diagrams however a reasonable effort has been made to accommodate visually impaired users All data tables have row and column titles compatible with speech enabled web browsers Tables that are merely used to align page elements layout tables do not use row or column headers New method content created or imported into EPF Composer may not have the required HTML tags to be compatible with speech enabled browsers Authors of new content should use the HTML editing mode in the Rich Text Editor to manually insert appropriate ALT attributes next to IMG SRC tags 12 3 EPF Composer User Roles and Tasks There are four primary user roles of the EPF Composer Method Author Process Author Process Configurator Practitioner Method Author The Method Author uses the tool on a regular basis to provide standard processes for use in an organisation The Method Author uses the full functionality of the tool to Create plug ins Create new method elements Extend existing method elements Create reusable capability patterns by reusing method elements Create delivery processes b
42. expand the tree node labelled Processes then Capability Patterns then Phase Iteration Templates The Configuration view panel should look like this 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 41 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 Configuration 23 ee oe publish openup Disciplines eS Domains Fe Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets C3 Tools 4 Processes fa Capability Patterns iS Basic Development Practice Patterns lS Basic Technical Architecture Practice Patterns iS Management Ss Construction Phase Iteration S Elaboration Phase Iteration S Inception Phase Iteration SS Transition Phase Iteration L Risk Value Lifecycle Phases L Technical fot Delivery Processes ey Custom Categories Guidance 3 Click Construction Phase Iteration A preview of the published page for the selected capability pattern is displayed in the right panel 4 A capability pattern contains a large amount of information and is displayed over four tabs Description m Work Breakdown Structure m Team Allocation Work Product Usage Explore the information on each tab Note When you click on a task in the Work Breakdown Structure tab you preview a Task Descriptor A task descriptor is a task within a process T
43. procs Select the method plupins content pecteges end processes thet wil be induded in this configuretion pubes Configersion protien vie ORecatcubte aros whenever configuration ts changed ay i ophons wa ba dey Fie caboulate errors ariy when Retresh Catton is clicked and when srding Hide errors kak Nethod Content caboubahe aras oriy wth eh Darton is and when STANA Hide warns 6 Propesses 7 Capability Potteres a labo 0 Detwery Proceeses Dye Content LSI LS Addl thew Cotespories Ls bee Configurators Die core E core my Senne sil E mA mMm hi practico iy Denk confgersion preter E pubisa pbs ebrd process gt my ghon puih ot prais ED pebiish pebies cperap Die NN plugin rietaeh_lor_prectos mgn paii Subtract these Categories core TE pradie Coefigration s amp obis My tesk digiton my phot Disciplines Domare 1 Work Prodxt Kine OD Rote Sets a Toot lt i Proosses Custom Categories Deserta A Guka Description Phig in 20d Package Selection Views gt Properties Problems 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 90 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The selection for publication of plug ins and packages in the configuration can be adjusted by selecting and clearing them in the tree display
44. providing a breakdown of reusable complex activities their relationships to the roles that perform the tasks within these activities in addition to the work products that are used and produced Examples of capability patterns include use case based requirements management use case analysis or unit testing 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 196 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Before creating a capability pattern do the following Select a Method Plug in to hold your process 165 Find or create a Process Package A capability pattern does not relate to any specific phase or iteration of a development lifecycle and should not imply any In other words a capability pattern should be designed in a way so that it is applicable anywhere in a delivery process This enables the pattern s activities to be flexibly assigned to whatever phases there are in the delivery process to which it is being applied There are several ways to populate a process with method elements By including already defined capability patterns By including parts of already defined capability patterns By incorporating individual method elements by dragging the elements onto an activity in the process By creating descriptors directly in t
45. roles work products and guidance elements using intuitive rich text editors that allow you to copy and paste text from other sources such as web pages or documents You can also use simple dialogs to establish relationships between content elements EPF Composer organises content in content packages that allow you to manage your content in configurable units EPF Composer also allows you to categorise your content based on a set of predefined categories for example categorise your tasks into development disciplines or your work products into domains or to create your own categorisation schemes for your content with your own user defined categories that allow you to index content in any way you want 3 3 Process Authoring Overview A process defines sequences of tasks performed by roles and the work products produced over time Figure 23 EPF Composer Process Authoring Representation lc Edt soh Configuration Egimation Window Lele ry SRL PF AP HF O cass wre hor lge prowcts x EI m Authoring BA Lbrary 2 E G Capabiity Pattern Smal Use Case based Process 7 D BB Phase on a Pnp A Presentation Name z J index mode info Tye _ Predea h E BA Method Content E Smal Use Case based Process 0 Capabiity Pa ES 7 Processes Inception 1 Prase m Ped gt E amp c formal resources BD understand Stakeholder Needs 2 Activity B D rup_legacy_evol_plugin R Find Actors a
46. see the Keyboard Assistance information from Microsoft http www microsoft com enable products keyboard aspx All of main menu commands in EPF Composer have keyboard shortcuts A list of these shortcuts can be displayed by using the Help menu and selecting Key Assist or by using the shortcut Ctrl Shift L To invoke the context menu while using the process editor press Shift F10 This menu allows you to open or create diagrams To invoke the context menu while using the diagram editor press Shift F10 This menu allows you to create diagram objects such as activities task descriptors and so on Keyboard Navigation EPF Composer uses standard Microsoft Windows navigation keys A list of common keyboard shortcuts is shown below To traverse to the next link button or topic press Tab inside a frame page To go to the next link button or topic node from inside a frame or page press Tab To expand and collapse a tree node press the Right and Left arrows To move to the next topic node press the Down arrow or Tab To move to the previous topic node press the Up arrow or Shift Tab To scroll all the way up or down press Home or End To go back press Alt Left arrow to go forward press Alt Right arrow To go to the next frame press Ctrl Tab To move to previous frame press Shift Ctrl Tab To print the current page or active frame press Ctrl P 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft Al
47. work products that are inputs and outputs for this task You can select any number of work products as mandatory inputs optional inputs and outputs To add a work product click the appropriate Add button select the work products that you want to add and click OK To remove a work product select it in the appropriate box and click the corresponding Remove button When you select a work product the brief description of the work product is displayed 24 Click the Guidance tab This part of the editor allows you to add and remove guidance for the task To add guidance click Add select the guidance that you want to add and click OK To remove guidance select it in the Guidance box and click Remove When you select a guidance element the brief description of the guidance is displayed 25 Click the Categories tab A task can be included in one discipline and any number of custom categories Open the Select window by clicking the appropriate Add button next to the category lists Select a single discipline or any number of custom categories and click OK To remove category fro a task select the category and click the appropriate Remove button 26 Click the Preview tab to view the newly created task as it will appear in a published Web page and save by closing the tab Related topics Method Plug in Configuration View Rich Text Editor Method Content Variability Method Content Create Method Content Create a Role
48. 4 is listed with libre xmi and any other dependent files 7 Select the top level folder for your project and click Commit Related topics Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS Add Elements to cysirer Bookmark not defined Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 5 Add Elements to CVS You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined These steps apply to elements such as roles tasks work products guidance categories configurations capability patterns and delivery processes To add method and process elements CVS Authori 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective PY ol 59 You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel 251 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 52 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 250 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under
49. 73 extends trans Tteration z E Blan and Manage Iteration Fa artonde nia Acti er Plan Iteration New Sibling r T Manage Heration Local Contribution y lS Assess Results Local Replacement B Develop Solution Increment Local Replacement and Deep Copy s E Test Solution Sibis z amp Ongoing Tasks RM bh Product Release Milestone Suppress Tasks 2 Update Suppression from Base 2 To create a local copy of the extended activity right click the top level of the extended activity and click Local Replacement and Deep Copy All the elements become local copies and appear in black 3 You can now modify the activity locally to your heart s extent without affect the original capability pattern Related topics Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Local Contribution Local Replacement 9 8 Process Element Properties View While editing a process you can use the process element Properties view to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties view If the Properties view is not open right click any element in a process and click Show Properties View The Properties view is the editor for activities task descriptors roles descriptors and work product descriptors The information for a desc
50. Associated element Custom Category Guidance Practice Role Set Task additional performer Task primary performer Guidance Role additional performer Role primary performer Section Step Task Work Product mandatory input Work Product optional input Work Product output Custom category Discipline Guidance Practice Tool Mentor ae Tool Guidance Section Custom category Domain Guidance Practice Work Product Role Task mandatory input Task optional input Task output Work Product deliverable Work Product kind k P Artef Work Product Artefact Work Product Artefact Work Product Artefact Work Product Deliverable Work Product Activity Activity gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 174 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Element Association direction Associated element Custom Category Any method content element Any standard category Custom category Discipline Grouping
51. Breakdown Structure right click the Requirements activity and select Diagrams gt Publishing Options Check or clear the types of diagram listed If a diagram type is not listed it means that you have not edited that diagram type for the activity yet 4 5 Publish Method Content This tutorial contains a brief summary of concepts followed by four guided exercises 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 88 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Learning objectives Upon completion of this tutorial you should be able to do the following Publish a predefined method configuration Create a custom category Publish a custom method configuration as a standalone Web site Time required The estimated time to complete this tutorial is about 45 minutes Prerequisites This tutorial uses content we created in the Create Method Content and Reuse Method Content tutorials If you have not completed those tutorials you should do so before continuing Lessons in this module Concepts This topic provides background information needed to complete this tutorial Publish A Method Configuration The goal of this exercise is to publish the method configuration that we created in an earlier exercise Create a Custom Category The goal of this
52. EPF 1 5 0 Win32 Download 78 MB 25 Aug 2008 EPF 1 5 0 Linu GTK Download 78 MB 25 Aug 2008 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 Win32 Download 518 kB 25 Aug 2008 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 Linu GTK Download 518 kB 25 Aug 2008 NLS Plugin and Feature Overlay Download NLS Pack for EPF 1 5 0 4 New Download 20 MB 19 October 2009 NLS Pack for EPF 1 5 to EPF 1 5 0 3 Download 20 MB 11 June 2009 The NLS Plug in is required if you want to use the EPF Composer and the published documentation in another language than English The NLS Pack is installed by just merging the NLS directory with the existing EPF Composer directory Click on Download to the right of EPF 1 5 04 New That brings up yet another webpage The page will depend upon the version that you have selected the graphic changes over time Figure 4 EPF Downloads Happy Birthday 10 Apache Foundation Visit ot S Home Downloads Users Members Committers Resources Projects About Us Eclipse downloads mirror selection All downloads are provided under the terms and conditions of the Eclipse Foundation Software User Agreement unless otherwise specified Downloads Home Bit Torrents By project By topic Download epf composer 1 5 0 4 win32zip from Source code More Packages France lalto http or pick a mirror site below Support the Eclipse community Friends of Eclipse Mirror 5 10 20 Canada Friends of Eclips
53. Eclipse Rich Client Platform RCP Therefore it installs independently from other Eclipse programmes The EPF Composer requires an installed Java Runtime Environment JRE For the current version 1 5 0 4 the JRE version 1 5 must be installed prior to the EPF Composer You can download and install the JRE from http www java com 1 1 Download Go to http www eclipse org epf and click on Downloads A new webpage comes up http www eclipse org epf downloads downloads php and you will see Figure 1 EPF Downloads Eclipse Process Framework EPF Downloads EPF Composer Download EPF Composer releases milestone builds and integration builds EPF Wiki Download EPF Wiki releases milestone builds EPF Practices Download EPF Practices library and published Web site including ABRD practice OpenUP Download OpenUP library and published Web site plus these published Web sites OpenUP DSDM and OpenUP ABRD Scrum Download Scrum library and published Web site gt x lt v Download XP library and published Web site Method Authoring Method for Eclipse Practices Library Download MAM EPL library and published Web site Under EPF Composer click on Download which brings up yet another web page http www eclipse org epf downloads tool tool_downloads php Figure 2 EPF Downloads Releases 1 5 0 4 Release New 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reser
54. Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 184 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 Categorising Method Content Contents Navigation Views Standard Method Categories Custom Categories 8 1 Navigation Views Categories are used to create navigation views for the final published Web site They are created to organise method content and process elements into logical categories that categories can appear in the final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of categories standard and custom Custom categories is the core element for creating navigation views Related topics Standard Method Categories Custom Categories Publish Configurations as Web Sites 8 2 Standard Method Categories Content categorisation can be based on a set of predefined categories called standard method categories Standard method categories are by definition linked to specific types of method content There is a standard category for grouping tasks called disciplines and there is a standard for categorising roles called role sets There are even two standard categories for grouping work products domains and work product kinds Each standard category can only contain the specified type of method content disciplines can
55. Page 178 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Changing the Default Copyright Notice Overriding the Default Copyright Notice Method Content Variability 7 5 2 Change Default Copyright Notice Remember The default copyright notice can only be changed in editable method plug ins To change the default copyright notice 1 In the Library view panel use the tree browser to locate the method plug in that you want to work on 2 Expand the method plug in node until you see the icon for the guidance element 3 Expand the Guidance node and double click the supporting material icon The guidance editor opens 4 Under Version Information select the copyright notice from the Copyright field and click Deselect 5 Click Select and select a different copyright notice from the list 6 Click the Preview tab to view your copyright notice 7 Close the window and save your changes Related topics Copyright Notices Create Copyright Notice Change Default Copyright Notice Override Default Copyright Notice Method Content Variability 7 5 3 Override Default Copyright Notice Sometimes elements in your method plug in may require a different copyright than the default for the plug in You can override the default copyright To override the copyright notice in a
56. Page 20 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 16 Method plug ins Import Method Plug ins e Select method plug ins Select one or more method plug ins to import If a selected plug in already exists ad in the current method library verify the version differences Available plug ins in the import directory Select All Deselect All 1TOGAF9 Selected plug in in the import directory Selected plug in found in the current library Author Author The Open Group Version Version Brief description Brief description Standard TOGAF9 X You select TOGAF9 and click on Finish You are in business You have now an Enterprise Architecture library in your work folder ept work TOGAF 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 21 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 17 Import Directory a mi TOGAF9 vili POR i E Authoring BA x eevro o TOGAF9 A Method Content a Content Packages Standard Categories Custom Categories ls Processes amp Capability Patterns 4a Delivery Processes Configurations TOGA
57. Perspective 2 Inthe Library view expand the Configurations folder 3 Right click the method configuration that you want to copy and click Copy 4 Right click the Configurations folder and click Paste Type a name for the new configuration The copied method configuration is pasted into the Configurations folder 5 Double click the newly pasted method configuration to open its configuration editor 6 In the configuration editor window enter a new name for your configuration in the Name field If you click anywhere in the Library view or Configuration View you will see your new configuration name in the Configurations folder in the Library view tree 7 Type a description for your configuration in the Description field then click File gt Save All to save your new method configuration 8 At the bottom of the editor window click the Plug in and Package Selection tab 9 The method configuration selection section shows a list of all method plug ins their content packages and processes Use the check boxes to add or remove plug ins packages and processes to or from your configuration Expand each plug in to select and clear individual packages and processes 10 Click File gt Save All 11 Define Views Navigation Views for the method configuration A view is a navigation tree browser in a published configuration Every published configuration can have several views that are displayed as stacked tree browser tabs The s
58. Process Engineer defines roles tasks work products and guidance in addition to the relationships between these elements In process authoring the Process Engineer defines the work to be done the results to be produced responsibilities for the roles and additional lifecycle elements such as iterations phases activities and milestones He incorporates the corresponding method elements combining them into process structures and sequences for carrying out work 5 10 2 Process Views To assign method content to a process there is a choice of working in different process views there are three work breakdown structure team allocation view and work product usage Each view supports a different approach for creating a process If requested the editor updates the other process views semi automatically using wizards that prompt for decisions on selection of method content elements 2 A method library is a container for method plug ins and method configuration definitions All method elements are stored in a method library 23 Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 4 Method libraries can be comprised of content from many types of methods
59. Re colawlate errors only when Refresh button is clicked and when seving Hide exrars Hicks wert nines Hide intus Content ElL add these cotegortes le e meug Oe Megi vim Method Content S Rale Sets u i a Ciment Parkagos Z my mw rale sel jja My Content Package Va Provesses w Se Caneqortes pi_my_new_plua Jn jm Methed Content ve Promsses wila Caley Subtract these Categories 5 l 4 uf lt My Penri FS Role S s l Description Description Plug in and Package Selection Virwes 5 The method Content selection section on the left shows a list of all Method Plug ins their content packages and processes Use the check boxes to add or remove plug ins packages and processes to or from your configuration Expand each plug in to select and clear individual packages and processes You can use the Expand All and Collapse All buttons to browse the hierarchy 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 140 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 Select Categories on the right to be added to or removed from the configuration definition You can add or remove elements that have been categorised with standard or custom categories On the right are all the method plug ins that were selected on the left in the method Co
60. Rich Text Editor 9 6 Activity Variability Activity variability is a mechanism for defining a new process iteration phase or activity Iteration phase and activity are three types of activity and a process is a sequence of these activities by referencing an existing base activity and then specifying the differences between them Process authors can use this mechanism to reuse and customise previously created activities in a new context It also provides a way to make changes to activities in a locked method plug in which otherwise could not be modified Activity variability is available for processes iterations phases or activities Activity variability is similar to Method Content Variability use activity variability to customise an existing activity There are three ways to ME A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 192 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties Vie
61. Rights Reserved Page 137 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer epf_work_training File Edit Search Configuration Window Help 4 Content Packages e First Content Package P HA gt Select a contiguration CAE oR Library E P 5 sy First Content Package i 5 pi my first plugin Content Package First Content Package Method Content General Intormation Provide general information about this content package Ge Roles Name First Content Package B Task Pr ii GZ Work Products Bain Ihe first content package in the training Guidance i Te E m Second Content Package Brief Friet of descriptipon of the Content Package description LA Roles Tasks v Dependencies Wark Products This section displays dependencies of this content package to other content packages Gh Guidance E d C Standard Categories c2 Custom Categories a 8 Processes Configurations Under General Information give the new content package a unique name and provide a brief description Important You cannot create a new content package or any other element in a locked method plug in Save your new content package There are four ways to save a package or an element Close the editor and confi
62. Select one of these merge options Override existing method library content with the imported content Merge imported content into the existing method library 5 Select one of these check base plug in options Check base plug ins Ignore and remove unresolved references 36 Method content previously exported including by Rational Method Composer as an XML file can be re imported An imported XML file will become a method plug in with a configuration 237 You can use the Publish Method Configuration wizard to generate a Web site based on a method configuration 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 245 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 Specify the location of your backup file The backup is a copy of your library before the merge takes place You have the option to Skip the backup if you want 7 A window opens indicating when the import is complete You can inspect the error log Click OK Related topics Export XML Export to Microsoft Project 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 246 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 1
63. Show Presentation Names amp amp Link with Editor Method Plug in Presentation gt Flat t Hierarchical m Click on some of the symbols and explore content in the plug ins Note the symbols become symbols Expanded tree nodes can be collapsed by clicking on the symbols Drill down into a practice s base plug in as follows expand practice gt tech gt use_case_driven_dev gt base gt Method Content gt Content Packages gt use case_driven_development gt Use Case Modelling gt Tasks The Library view panel should look like this The view and the content may change somewhat according to revisions 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 38 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Library 3 x Ea gt E 8 core A 8 practice 8 mgmt 8 tech H concurrent_testing iH continuous_integration E evolutionary_arch 8 evolutionary _design E shared_vision E test_driven_development 8 use_case_driven_dev assign base 5 5 Method Content Py Content Packages release_info 3 5 use case_driven_development BA Use Case Modeling CS Roles R Tasks D detail_use_case_scenarios ucm H E F E work Products es Guidance v Note that individual tasks are repre
64. This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer What this message attempts to say not very clearly however is that you have the choice of either using the files in the epf_work_practices folder or creating a separate folder using the operating system s file utility and letting the epf composer copy the existing files over to the new folder In the latter case you will have two sets of files one working set that you can modify and another with the original pristine and unchanged files When you want to work with an existing set of library files click on Skip 6 8 Create a New Method Library All method content is contained in the method library To create a new method library 1 To create a new method library make sure you are in the Authoring Perspective 2 You can begin the method library creation process in two ways a Click File gt New gt Method Library Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer File Edit Search Configuration Window Help o gt Method Library pen gt gt Method Plug in 3 Method Configuration Fi Other b You can also click the Down Arrow of the New icon ri in the toolbar and select Method Library from the drop down list Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer File Edit Search Configura
65. To move a selected node in one direction pixel by pixel Select the node hold the Control key and press the cursor keys in the direction that you want to move the selected node 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 225 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To move a selected node or nodes in a vertical or horizontal plane using the mouse Select the node or nodes to move hold the Shift key and hold the primary mouse button on the selected node Drag the node or nodes with the mouse in the direction that you want to move them To align nodes with one another Select the nodes of interest open the pop up menu and choose Format gt Align followed by your choice of alignment To bend a link line Select the link grab the centre dot and drag it with the mouse to the preferred point Activity diagrams in extended capability patterns You can reuse an existing capability pattern or parts of a capability pattern such as an activity in another process When you reuse another pattern by either copying or extending it any diagrams that you have created are also included in your process However when you extend a capability pattern the diagrams from the base pattern are not updated when the diagram for the base pattern is changed To retriev
66. a task or activity Click Add and enter the index number for the task or activity on which the current element is dependent The dependency type defaults to Finish to Start If you want to set another dependency type click Edit and select the required dependency type in the dependency drop down box Finish to Start Finish to Finish Start to 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 217 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Start Start to Finish You can enter a different index number in the Edit window You can also remove a dependency by selecting the dependency and clicking Remove Method task The base method element for the descriptor is displayed on the page You can select a different element by clicking Link Method Element and selecting the required element Documentation tab The Documentation tab contains descriptive attributes for the descriptor or activity Rollup tabs The Properties view for an activity includes rollup tabs that provide lists of tasks roles or work products rolled up or summarised for the activity Association tabs The remaining tabs Funny there is only one remaining tab which is the Guidance tab are used to add or remove associations between the activity or the descriptor to method elements
67. about how to perform a role how to create a work product how to perform your task and so on 74 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 148 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 75 76 77 78 17 In the Presentation name field type a presentation name The presentation name is the name that appears in your published content and in the Configuration View You can also make this name appear in the Library view by toggling the Show Presentation Names button ain the Library view toolbar 18 In the Brief Description field type a short description of the new task 19 Type a more detailed description of the new task in the Main Description field The main description is a more detailed version of the description that you entered in the Brief Description field There are three ways that you can create text for the description Directly by typing it manually in the editor Copy from another similar role and then modify by using the editor
68. and whole families of different processes A method configuration defines a logical subset of a method library You use method configurations to define the scope of your authoring work and when publishing or exporting content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 116 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The primary process authoring view can be any of the following Work Breakdown Structure View The process is created by defining a work structure a hierarchical breakdown of work From there the iterations and activities are created first and the activities are subsequently populated by applying tasks from the method content Team Allocation View The process is created by defining which teams and roles will participate in activities and finding the relevant work products and tasks In a process that has been already created the roles can be reviewed and tasks or work products can be added to the existing process m Work Product Usage View The process is created by defining which work products should be created in activities and finding responsible roles and tasks and roles from there In a process that has been already created the work products can be reviewed and tasks or roles can be added to the process 5 10 3 Capability Pattern
69. any of the base element s existing properties 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 177 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 5 Copyright Notices You can specify the default copyright for all elements in a particular method plug in by using the method plug in editor Copyright notices are stored as supporting material elements For more information about using the method plug in editor to change the default copyright see Change Default Copyright Notice Sometimes elements in your method plug in may require a different copyright than the default one For this procedure see Override Default Copyright Notice Frequently a method plug in contains contributing elements with a different copyright than the base elements that receive the contribution When there are multiple contributing elements each with its own copyright notice the individual copyrights are appended to each other in the generated page on the published site When you create a new method plug in you should also create a supporting materials guidance element with the appropriate copyright information For this procedure see Create Copyright Notices Related topics Create Copyright Notices Change Default Copyright Notice Override Default Copyright N otice
70. as your view Click the sign to expand your category and view its contents Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple views d Click OK The window closes and the views that you selected are added to the configuration 12 Select the view that you want to display as your configuration s start up view and click Make Default The start up view is the first view shown when a published configuration is displayed for the first time 13 Click File gt Save All Related topics Method Configurations Create a Method Configuration Method Plug in Method Content Package Create a Method Plug in 6 13 Search for Content To search for content 1 Use one of the following three options to search for method content m Click Search gt Search m Click Search gt File F Click the Search f icon in the tool bar The Search Window opens 2 Click either the File Search tab or the Method Search tab and set your criteria Using File Search Type a text string to search for within the files optional or type a file name pattern to use for matching file names You must use a pattern Use if you want to search for the text in all files Leave all other options as default Using Method Search In the method library you can search method content for text strings in the element s documentation or search elements by name 51 A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and method p
71. be published Architectural Reference Model The method library can contain any number of method plug ins and you will have to decide how to split your subject area into smaller sub areas each sub area represented by a method plug in Each sub area can then be developed independently with each sub area represented by a method plug in and the sub areas can subsequently be aggregated to form a complete solution represented by the method library The approach imply an architecture based reference model for the larger subject area The method plug ins you create will mimic the architecture reference model you have chosen Related topics Method Content Packages Create a Method Plug in 70 A method content package is a container for method elements Elements are organised in method packages to structure a large scale of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse 1 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 103 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 5 4 Method Content Elements Method content elements describe roles the ta
72. by one person or multiple people One person may fill several roles Roles perform tasks Work product is a general term for task inputs and outputs Work Product descriptions of content elements that are used to define anything used Descriptor produced or modified by a task There are three types of work product Artefact Outcome and Deliverable a Capability patterns are a special type of process that describes a reusable cluster of activities in common process areas they express and communicate process knowledge for a key area of interest Capability patterns are used as building blocks to assemble delivery processes or larger capability patterns ensuring optimal reuse and application of the key practices they express Capability Pattern A delivery process describes a complete and integrated approach for Delivery Process performing a specific type of project Process Packages provide visual groupings of processes Process Packages can be created both under Capability Patterns and under Delivery Processes Process Package New Capability Patterns can be created both directly under Capability Patterns and under any Process Package New Delivery Processes can be created both directly under Delivery Processes and under any Process Package Guidance elements are supplementary free form documentation such as white papers concept descriptions guidelines templates examples Guidan
73. can simply add his proposal for improvement This feedback then may be collected decided upon and used to create a new release However in some cases this is not sufficient to achieve user acceptance The EPF Wiki is another mean to collect user feedback by allowing the user to add the feedback directly to the provided content For the installation and usage of the EPF Wiki please refer to the project home on http www eclipse org epf downloads epfwiki downloads php And http wiki eclipse org EPF_Wiki_ Installation Guide The installation of EPF Wiki will not be part of this document 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 13 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 2 2 2 EPF Practices The practices library is included as part of the EPF 1 5 Most of the open source content derives from OpenUP 1 0 refactored to support independent practices The ABRD Agile Business Rule Development content is now included in the EPF Practices Library as well ABRD addresses the development of business application using rule engine technology and Business Rule Management System On the first download page Figure 7 Click on Downloads under EPF Practices A new webpage appears Figure 8 EPF Practices Downloads EPF Practices Downloads
74. category Click Add next to the Disciplines field and then select development_discipline Click OK to save changes and close the selection window 11 Close the task editor panel to save your changes 12 Switch to the Browsing perspective 13 In the Configuration view panel expand Disciplines gt Development and click the Extends Design Solution task You will see in the generated page that method content and relationships are inherited from the base task and customised by extending content and relationships Note also that the extended task remains unchanged 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 75 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer File Edit Search Configuration Window Help eo my basic configuration x AOR FY B Browsing x 22 Configuration 53 1 ate Oi mA content us SD G o my basic configuration E Disciplines amp Bl Architecture g Development Integrate and Create Build D Design the Solution gt Implement Developer Tests D Implement Solution D Run Developer Tests a Task Extends Design Solution f Extends Task Brief Description Le Disciplines Development Extends Design the Solution Expand All
75. characteristics of the base element Both the extender and the base element appear in the published Web site Out relationships from the base are added to the extender In relationships in the extender are left untouched the base element s are ignored Text is added from the base if the extender has no value defined for the given section Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions Extends and Replaces This variability relationship combines the effects of extends and replace variability into one variability type Whereas the replaces variability completely replaces all attributes and outgoing association instances of the base variability element with new values and instances or removes all values or association instances if the replacing element does not define any extends and replaces variability only replaces the values that have been redefined and leaves all other values of the base element as is Browsing Variability Relationships You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements the complete hierarchy of variability associations for an element can be displayed graphically Related topics A
76. clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Click the Work Product Usage tab and select the activity to be rendered by the diagram by right clicking it 5 Select Diagrams gt Open Work Product Dependency Diagram from the pop up menu You can also specify your own diagram image to use for this diagram by selecting Diagrams gt User Defined Diagrams Presentation Name Properties General Documentation Guidance Wark Roflup Team Rollup Work Product Rollup S my_first_delivery process my_first_delivery_process nvy_first_iteration my_first_phase SS Yimy_fiest_actvity Description Work Breakdown Str Activity my_first_ activity Gen Pravic Name Preset Elop Ev Model Info comtributes to My _New_Capability_Pattem My Plug in New Chad New Sling Add from Method Content Apply Pattern Default Synchronization froen Method Contest Custom Synchronization Suppress Update Suppression from Base J Qutdent Rall Up Diagrams gt Expand All Collapse All Preferences Copy K Delete Refresh Show Properties View gt b amp Open Work Product Dependency Diagram t Open Activity Diagram Entr Exit Deliverabl Publishing Options User Defined Dragrams Z Manned Repeatable 6 The Work Product Dependency Diagram editor opens 721 You can select the process
77. content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 205 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Remember It is not required to add a task A valid process can contain just roles and work products 5 Specify the entry and exit states of the work product for the activity to which it was added 6 Review the new work product descriptor details in the Properties view If the Properties view is not displayed right click the work product descriptor in the process editor and then click Show Properties View Use the tabs on the side of the Properties view to review different aspects of the work product descriptor In the Properties view you can also perform individual modifications of the work product descriptor such as change the presentation name add textual descriptions add entry and exit states and more 7 Continue adding work products to your activities Related topics Process Management Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Create Delivery Processes Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Process Element Properties View Activity Variability Types
78. control Add a new library to CVS ____ 3 Authoring Make sure you are in the Authoring perspective me Authorino 2 Click File gt New gt Method Library In the New Method Library window enter a Name Description and Location for the new library Click Finish oo Switch to the Resource perspective Select the Project Explorer view Right click the folder having the same name as the library created in Step 3 Click Team gt Share Project The window opens o NO A To add your library to a new or existing repository location follow the instructions in the window Related topics Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to cCysETor Bookmark not defined Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined 245 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 246 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 47 You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relatio
79. default levelseparator is o see wsee With this parameter you can define the text before a keyword when it is referring to another keyword This parameter is optional The default levelseparator is See seealso see also With this parameter you can define the text inserted before a keyword when it is referring to another keyword This parameter is optional The default levelseparator is See also 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 182 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Parameter Setting Description This parameter defines which style in a cascading style sheet CSS will be used to for the different keyword levels The syntax to use is keywordlevel reservedname stylename keywordlevel reservedname is either the level of the keyword 1 or 2 or 3 Alternately you can use one of the two reserved names defaultstyle or headlinestyle defaultstyle index stylename is the name of the style The KeyWordIndex application adds a prefix p to the stylename This means levelstyle levelstyle level2 if the style sheet defines define styles for the classes 1 indexlevell p indexlevell and p indexlevel2 then stylename is indexlevell or indexlevel2 The at
80. define processes of which EPF Composer support two main kinds delivery processes and capability patterns Delivery processes represent a complete and integrated process template for performing one specific type of project They describe a complete end to end project lifecycle and they are used as a reference for running projects with similar characteristics Capability patterns are processes that express and communicate process knowledge for a key area of interest such as a discipline or a best practice They are also used as building blocks to assemble delivery processes or larger capability patterns This ensures optimal reuse and application of their key best practices in process authoring activities in EPF Composer Related Topics Method Content Authoring Overview Process Authoring Overview 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 29 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 3 2 Method Content Authoring Overview Method content describes roles the tasks that they perform the work products that are used and produced by those tasks and supporting guidance Figure 22 EPF Composer Method Content Representation Fie Edt Search Confgurston Window Help OpenuPSasi MEOE ARE EI mA Authoring G eroweng Configuration amp 7 O mi content PoE
81. elements and nodes Press Escape to navigate between different level menus Press Tab to navigate to the Palette tab and use Up Arrow or Down Arrow to navigate To move around an element in a diagram press Ctrl Up Down Left Right Press Up Down Left Right key to navigate between different elements To navigate to Properties tab for an element use the Application key and choose the Show Properties View menu In the Properties tab for a diagram use Tab and Up Arrow or Down Arrow to navigate between different sections Publishing In the Publish Wizard press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to switch between publish format Press Tab to navigate between buttons In the third window of the Publish Wizard press Up Arrow or Down Arrow and the Space key to check or clear tree items In the fourth window of the Publish Wizard press the Space key to check or clear a checkbox Use Up Arrow or Down Arrow to navigate checklists 12 2 Preferences Set preferences to define default application behaviours To access the Preferences window click Window gt Preferences Change a setting in the Preferences and click Apply Click OK to set the preference and close the window To restore the preferences to the default settings click Restore Defaults 12 2 1 Method Parameters The following table describes each preference in the Method section that can impact EPF Composer Table 12 EPF Composer preferences Setting Descrip
82. exercise is to use the custom categories feature Create a Custom Method Configuration The goal of this exercise is to create a new customised method configuration Later in this tutorial we will publish this configuration Publish a Custom Method Configuration The goal of this exercise is to publish a method configuration 4 5 1 Concepts This topic provides background information needed to complete this tutorial EPF Composer is essentially a content management and publishing application Its output is a Web site with method guidance and processes that can be used by a project team A method configuration is a structured set of content packages selected from different method plug ins containing the method and process content that will be included in the published Web site Upon publication the method configuration is combined with different Navigation views that define the Web site s navigation structures and content organisation 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 89 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The Browsing perspective renders the method configuration content in Web HTML format thereby providing a preview of the method configuration before it is published Using custom categories you can categorise content acc
83. following are the main features of the user interface Configuration selection box Publish cpenup M Use this box to select a configuration in which to work Open Perspective menu E Use this pull down menu to select a perspective The following perspectives can be selected i Authorin i Authoring Perspective A iormg B Browsing Browsing Perspective E z f z CVS Repository Exploring du CVS Reposito ly Resource m Resource ED Team Synchr Team Synchronising a est Library view 26 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 122 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The Library view displays the Method Plug ins and Configurations contained in a Method Library Configuration view The Configuration view shows the content elements in a library filtered by a configuration Content Editors
84. form of work products packaged for delivery Deliverables are also used to represent an output from a process that has value material or otherwise to a client customer or other stakeholder 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 270 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Delivery process A delivery process is the process that covers a whole development lifecycle from beginning to end A delivery process can be used as a template for planning and running a project It provides a complete lifecycle model with predefined phases iterations and activities Discipline A discipline is a categorisation of tasks that are related to a major area of concern and cooperation of work effort For example on a software development project it is common to perform certain requirements tasks in close coordination with analysis and design tasks Separating these tasks into separate disciplines makes the tasks easier to comprehend Disciplines can be organised using discipline groupings Domain A domain is a hierarchy of related work products grouped together based on timing resources or relationship While a domain categorises many work products a work product belongs to only one domain Domains can be further divided into sub domains Estimating consid
85. i This task des detail requirements for the system Disciplines Requirements HB Expand All Sections E Collapse All Sections The purpose of this task is to describe one or more requirements in sufficient detail to validate understanding of the requirement to ensure concurrence with stakeholder expectations and to permit software development to begin Roles Prenary Performa e Analyst Inputs Outputs Process Usage ENN Homegrown Methods Detail Use Cases and scenarios Detail Supporting Requirements Detail Glossary terms The figure above illustrates how method content is represented in EPF Composer Many development methods are described in publications such as books articles training material standards and regulations and other forms of documentation These sources usually document methods by providing step by step explanations for a particular way of achieving a specific development goal under general circumstances Some examples are transforming a requirements document into an analysis model defining an architectural mechanism based on functional and non functional requirements creating a project plan for a development iteration defining a quality assurance plan for functional requirements redesigning a business organisation based on a new Strategic direction and so on EPF Composer takes content as described above and structures it in a specific schema of roles work products task
86. i G panarama pos ical Supplementary Specficatons 54 Optonal Input Arofact 4B 0 t Requirements Management Plar 55 Optional Input Artfact G Emin A Vision 36 Optional Input Artfact EF tation L Storyboard 7 Optional Inout Artifact le fact GB Project t Sa Use Case s Outut Arti G aR my lt gt Supplementary Specficatons 59 Output Artfact Gossary BY ansiyze Behaviour 2 Actsty Ri Anbu RO Use Case Analysis 6 Task Descriptor gt ry paari rates cy BY Design Component 7 Activity jequrements Manageme N gt x E D Software Requirement 3 GX Use Case Desion te Task Descroter 5 Big Software Requirements S E JD Stakeholder Requests Description Work Breakdown Structure Team Alocaton Work Product Usage Consobdated View z gt Storyboard m Pr 5 r opertes BB Supplementary Speaficat a General TaskDescriptor detail_a_use_case Documentation Steps Roles This task desorotor refers to folowing steps Work Products S Selected Steps teps Review and Refine the Scenaros Breakdown Iterations 7 auteta ane cece s Tustrate Relstonships vath Actors and Use Cases Increments Sprints Waterfall Desctbe any Spedel Reqdrenents lt gt Evaluate Your Results fae y The figure above shows that processes are typically expressed as workflows or breakdown structures Defining a strict sequence as in a waterfall model is as much a process as is defining semi ordered sequences in iterations of para
87. in my_p ug in gt Method Content locate the Role Sets folder Right click Role Sets and select New gt Role Set Create a new Role Set named my_design with a presentation name of My Design 4 Add the role my_user_interface_designer to the my_design Role Set There are two ways that you can do this a In the Standard Category editor for my_ design open the Roles tab and add the role to the role set 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 61 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer gB Select Dialog Roles Method Element Type Roles x Name patterns matching names will be shown my Patterns are separated by comma where any string any character my_plug in A my_content_package Brief Description The User Interface Designer coordinates the design of the user interface User Interface Designers are also involved in gathering usability requirements and prototyping candidate user interface designs to meet those requirements b In the Role editor for my_user_interface_designer open the Categories tab and add the my_design category as a selected role set 4 2 11 Add a Method Plug in to a Configuration The goal of this exercise is to include the method plug in created earli
88. in this perspective so that you can see the resulting page but without resolving all the contributing elements that make up that page The Browsing Perspective provides a more complete preview of the generated configuration but you cannot modify it You might want to use this perspective to verify new or edited configurations before publishing them The Browsing perspective displays all contributing components but does not show the tree Browser that will be automatically built and included in the configuration when it is published 4 1 2 Basic Navigation The goal of this exercise is to switch between perspectives and see the features they provide To navigate in the authoring and browsing perspectives 1 Open the epfpractices library by clicking File gt Open gt Method Library then browse to select the library folder and click Finish 2 The current perspective is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the main toolbar The two perspectives you will use most often are Authoring LE Authoring land Browsing sina Click on the Open Perspective icon FS and note the other perspectives available through this menu 3 You can also change perspectives by clicking on the symbol to the right of the perspective indicator Try using this control to switch back and forth between perspectives 4 Switch to the Authoring perspective if you re not already in it In the left hand side of the main window you should see two panels wi
89. is created in the context of the process This is called a task descriptor The same task can 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 119 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer be referenced any number of times in the same process In other words one task can have many task descriptors in a process A task descriptor can contain additional information that modifies the base task without actually changing it For example roles and work products can be added or suppressed and steps can be suppressed or re sequenced 5 10 8 Process Content Summary Table 3 Summary of Process Content Term Description Activities are the main building blocks for processes An activity is a collection of work breakdown elements such as task descriptors role Activity descriptors work product descriptors and milestones Activities can include other activities The three activity types are Iterations Phases and Activities A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a Task Descriptor specific role The duration of a task is generally a few hours to a few days Tasks usually generate one or more work products A role is a well defined set of related skills competencies and Role Descriptor responsibilities Roles can be filled
90. is used to customise configurations the link is there somehow Variability Type Variability type describes how one element affects another through variability associations The five types of variability associations are Variabilit a ee Y Association Description Type Not The element is a base element and does not affect another element through Applicable variability This is the default value of an element s variability type Contributes A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute with their properties to their base element without 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 193 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Variability Type Association Description directly changing any of its existing properties The base appears in the published Web site but the contributing element does not In and out relationships from the contributing element are added to the base Text from the contributing element is appended to corresponding base sections a When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing e
91. isolation of other method elements and guidance Work product Work product is a general term for task inputs and outputs descriptions of content elements that are used to define anything used produced or modified by a task The three types of work product are Artefact Outcome Deliverable Work product descriptor A work product descriptor is a work product in the context of one specific activity Every breakdown structure can define different relationships of work product descriptors to task descriptors and role descriptors One work product can be represented by many work product descriptors each within the context of an activity with its own set of relationships Work product kind Work product kind is another category for grouping work products A work product can belong to multiple work product kinds 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 274 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 14 Document Management 14 1 Document Details Fields Content Document EPF MANO1 Document name EPF Installation Tutorial and Manual Description Document with installations instructions a number of tutorials and a manual 14 2 Document History Date Version Status Author s
92. labelled Capability Patterns with all associated capability pattern elements Folder with all a Role elements associated D 7 Folder for remaining associated guidance elements a Sub folder for every guidance type except concepts or roadmaps For example guideline template and so on b Tool mentors are organised in a Folder named Tools 8 List of all Categories associated to the practice element a Sub hierarchy of sub categories and their categorised elements 9 Additional rules for the above topics a If any of the folder elements listed above are empty it will not be published 103 Guidance is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most Method and Process elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements 104 A role defines a set of related skills competencies and responsibilities of an individual or individuals 105 A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a specific role The granularity of a task is generally a few hours to a few days and usually affects one or a small number of work products 106 4 work product is a term that is used to describe task inputs and outputs 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 158 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework
93. lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 12 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 7 EPF Downloads Eclipse Process Framework EPF Downloads EPF Composer Download EPF Composer releases milestone builds and integration builds EPF Wiki Download EPF Wiki releases milestone builds EPF Practices Download EPF Practices library and published Web site including ABRD practice OpenUP Download OpenUP library and published Web site plus these published Web sites OpenUP DSDM and OpenUP ABRD Scrum Download Scrum library and published Web site Download XP library and published Web site Method Authoring Method for Eclipse Practices Library Download MAM EPL library and published Web site 2 2 1 EPF Wiki There is no need to download the EPF Wiki at least not at this stage You may however consider installing the EPF Wiki later An important success factor for living process descriptions is the possibility for the users to give feedback on the content Even without the EPF Wiki after you have published your process description users can provide feedback using the appropriate link in the upper right corner of the browser window This creates for instance an e mail with a link to the currently displayed page and the user
94. materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution Eclipse Process Framework EPF Composer User Manual EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 5 Key Concepts Contents m Method Library Schema Method Library m Method Plug in Method Content Elements Method Content Package Method Content Variability Method Content Categories Method Configurations Process Management 5 1 Method Library Schema The EPF Composer imposes a strict schema with a structure of virtual folders nodes being created automatically in response to user action The folders are virtual to the extent that they do not always correspond to folders in the file system We will often simply write Folder or Node Each of these will be explained in the subsequent chapters The word Create in the following table showing the Library structure indicates that the EPF Composer has created an empty folder to contain user defined content Schematically the Library has the following structure 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 99 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Table 1 Library Structure 1 Method Plug ins Create 1 1 Method Conte
95. method library are organised by their intended function in the same way that similar parts are organised on a shelf in the warehouse All method content is organised in Method Plug ins The Method Plug ins contain method Content and Processes Library m Plug ins Configurations m Content Processes a Content Content Capability Delivery Packages Categories Patterns Processes Method Content consists of method Content Packages and Standard amp Custom Categories Method Content Packages contain four types of elements Tasks Roles Work Products and Guidance There are five Standard Categories Disciplines Domains Work Product Kinds Role Sets and Tools The two types of Processes are Capability Patterns and Delivery Processes Processes organise method content elements into semi ordered sequences customised for specific types of projects 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 35 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 25 Method Library Content 1 Method Plug ins m Method Content Content Packages Roles Tasks Work Products Guidance Standard Categories Disciplines Domains Work Product Kinds Role Sets Tools Custom Categories m Processes Capability Patterns Delive
96. of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements See the following example XE Main description Normal w Arial wv 4 v BAZI BIULL 2 Yr He Ze ele aAa o ALL local team members should follow these guidelines Rich Text HTML 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 162 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Button functions You can use pull down menus in the editor to apply specific styles and specify a font and a font size You can use the buttons in the editor to perform following functions Cut text and save it to the clipboard removing the original E Copy text to the clipboard leaving the original text in place Paste text from the clipboard You can also right click and select Paste as Plain Text Remove all the contents in the text editor window Make selected text bold Make selected text italic Make selected text underlined Make selected text superscripted a Es p D z m Make selected text subscripted Run cleaning utility see below for more detail Add an ordered list a Add an unordered list E Indent selected text
97. of multi presentation process editors different process views and synchronisation of all views with process changes Supporting reusable dynamically linked process patterns of best practices for rapid process assembly via drag and drop Select combine tailor and rapidly assemble process configurations from method content for an organisation s development projects A common management structure look and feel for all of an organisation s method content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 26 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Authoring methods and processes with rich content such as text images and multimedia while remaining independent of the process architecture Managing method content using simple form based user interfaces and intuitive rich text editors for creating illustrative content descriptions Supporting multiple views of method content through textual and graphical representation and editors allow use of styles images tables hyperlinks and direct html editing Visually communicating a clear understanding of how the different tasks within a method relate to each other Providing just in time generation of publication previews in dedicated browsing perspectives that allows a consistent look and feel to published
98. one models xmi file for each method library The file contains references to all estimating models and estimating factors in the method library The models xmi file resides under folder called estimation This file is modified when a new estimating model is created an existing estimating model is renamed a new default estimating factor is created or one of the default estimating factors is models xmi modified This file is created in the second step of the estimating model wizard when a user clicks Next Rational ClearCase prompts to add to source two elements a folder named estimation and the models xmi file Select the Keep checkout option and click OK to add to source control This file is shared by all estimating models in the library so care must be taken to coordinate changes made by anyone who uses it diagram xmi All diagrams are stored in this file Related topics Integration with Rational ClearCase 11 2 2 Common Actions Impact on Specific Files Changes made to method elements often affect more than one file In multiuser environments it is important to understand which actions will affect multiple files and act accordingly For more information about actions by multiple users see Multiuser scenarios with IBM Rational ClearCase It is a good practice to have all file updates to a library under version control be performed with the integrated version control support provided by E
99. own text to the diagram Start Node After you add the text to the diagram you can open the End Node Properties view via the pop up menu to set display and font Fork Node properties sed de Control Flow Use this tool to draw directional arrows from 3 Merge Node one node on your diagram to another E activity Activity Partition Use this tool to create swim lanes in amp Iteration your activity diagrams After you create a partition you can Phase drag other elements inside to add them to the partition You l Milestone can alternatively add or remove elements to a partition via L Task Descriptor the Advanced Properties view Geometric Shapes Start Node and End Node Use these tools to identify the start and end of the workflow Fork Node Use this tool to depict the beginning of concurrent threads of control Join Node Use this tool to depict the end of concurrent threads of control The workflow cannot continue past the Join Node until all of the flows that it joins have completed Decision Node Use this tool to show the control flow coming out of a decision Merge Node Use this tool to merge two or more distinct flows back to one common flow You can also add new process elements to your diagram using Iteration Phase Activity Milestone or Task Descriptor Drawing aids The activity diagram editor provides several aids to manipulate and improve the appearance of your diagram
100. parameter keywordresultfile The value of this parameter is either a relative path from where this program is executed or an absolute path This parameter is mandatory keywordfile keywords txt This parameter defines the internal references within the index For more information see the Internal references This parameter is optional leavedir _ borders This parameter can occur in the definition file more than once It is used to define which directories that will not be searched for keywords The path is relative to the directory defined by the parameter wwwroot This parameter is optional mulitdocumentkeywo rd false This parameter defines if a keyword is allowed to be in more than one document The default value is false This parameter is optional showdocumenttitle false This parameter defines if the text of the link to a document containing this keyword will be the name of the keyword or the title of the document Default is false True is only applicable if the value of the parameter mulitdocumentkeyword is set to true This parameter is optional prefix XE_ With this parameter you can define the prefix of the keywords this application will search for This parameter is optional The default prefix is XE_ levelseparator With this parameter you can define the separator between different levels in a keyword this application will search for This parameter is optional The
101. processes distributed through the organisation and rapid configuration switching Publishing process configurations using a number of platform independent output formats such as HTML and PDF Lowering the cost of reuse of method content across an organisation and providing rich extensibility capabilities Key terminology and concepts To work effectively work the EPF Composer you need to understand a few concepts that are used to organise the content The pages Method Content Authoring Overview and Process Authoring Overview contain more detail and concrete examples of how to work with the tool This page provides you with a general overview of these concepts The most fundamental principle in EPF Composer is the separation of reusable core method content from its application in processes This directly relates back to the two purposes of EPF Composer described in the first section Almost all of EPF Composer s concepts are categorised along this separation Method Content describes what is to be produced the necessary skills required and the step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved These method content descriptions are independent of a development lifecycle Processes describe the development lifecycle Processes take the method content elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customised to specific types of projects 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Right
102. products the role is responsible for and more 8 Continue adding roles to your activities You can preview what your process will look like in a published Web site at any time by switching to the Browsing Perspective and then selecting the process or an activity in the process in the Configuration View You can use the links on the page to navigate through the process Switch back to the Authoring Perspective to continue editing your process Related topics 187 Process Management Create Capability Patterns 186 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 187 A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 204 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which acco
103. sequence of the items in the category This affects the sequence of the items in the Library View Configuration View and in a published Web site if the custom category is included as a view in a configuration Use the Sort Type Box to specify the sequence 3 To save your custom category click File gt Save or close the editor and click Yes when prompted to save the changes To delete a custom category 1 Right click the custom category that you want to delete and select Delete and click OK 2 Click OK to confirm removal of the customer category 19 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 169 Method content and process elements are organized into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of categories standard and custom 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 189 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To rename a custom category 1 Right click the custo
104. should be created in activities and find tasks and roles from there For more information about work products see Develop a Work Product Usage Structure 15 Apply a Capability Pattern or capability pattern parts to the delivery process Process Packages can be created both under Capability Patterns and under Delivery Processes New Capability Patterns can be created both directly under Capability Patterns and under any Process Package New Delivery Processes can be created both directly under Delivery Processes and under any Process Package 173 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 174 amp work breakdown structure is a hierarchical breakdown of work such as activities tasks and steps defining a process 175 Tn the Team Allocation view you can create a process by defining which roles participate in activities and find responsible work products and tasks from there You can also review the roles in a process that has been created by adding tasks or work products to the process 176 Ty the Work Product Usage view you can create a process by defining which work products will be created and used in the process and then finding responsible roles and tasks from there You can also review
105. that has been created by adding tasks or roles to the process 179 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 198 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 9 2 Create Delivery Processes A delivery process describes a complete and integrated approach for performing a specific type of project and reflects the project s specific planning and project management needs A delivery process describes what is produced how it is produced and the staffing required for the entire project lifecycle Before creating a delivery process Select a Method Plug in a Find or create a Process Package to hold your process 172 There are several ways to populate a process with method elements By including already defined capability patterns By including parts of already defined capability patterns By incorporating individual method elements by dragging the elements onto an activity in the process By creating descriptors directly in the process which are either unrelated to any method content or related to method content at a later point in t
106. the Authoring Perspective double click the configuration in the configurations folder to which you want to add a view Click the Views tab and then click Add View The Select Categories window opens The Select Categories window opens all the standard and custom categories in the configuration Select one or more categories to include as a view in your configuration and click OK The view display provides a preview of how the view is displayed in the published tree browser Select a view to display as the default start up view in the published Web site and click Make Default You will normally not make a standard category your default view since it can contain only one type of method content You will typically select a custom category for your default view To save the configuration click File gt Save or close the configuration editor and click Yes when prompted to save the changes 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 186 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Method Content Method Content Package Create Method Content Custom Categories 8 3 Custom Categories Custom categories are used to compose Navigation Views thereby providing a means to organise method content for publishing A Navigation Vi
107. the library elements that are used in that configuration Content in the Configuration View is always organised by using the same set of folders regardless of which configuration is selected 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 36 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The Library View shows the complete list of all Method Plug Ins together with Method Configurations This simple and flat list of all Method Content Packages can be long and unwieldy and the library view offers a hierarchical view of Method Plug ins grouped together in logical packages or sets of Method Plug ins Using dots in the name of the plug ins creates the logical groupings of method plug ins displayed in hierarchical presentations Perspectives Perspectives are similar to modules but they are used for different high level operations The two main perspectives that are commonly used in routine operations are the Authoring and Browsing perspectives The Authoring Perspective is designed for content editing and configuration operations You can create and maintain method content by using the editors in this perspective that are optimised for particular content types As you create and modify content you will use this perspective most of the time There is a preview option
108. the system Click OK to complete the selection You can now continue using the role editor The Content Variability section should look like this Content ariability Variability type Base Specify how this role relates to another role Contributes ix a architect core default role_def base basic_roles 7 Add some sample text to the Brief description and Main description fields Brief description Contributing brief description text Main description Contributing main description text 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 67 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer We will look for these text strings later in this exercise Save your changes by closing the role editor 8 In the Library view under Configuration double click my basic configuration to open it 9 Click the Plug in and Package Selection tab Make sure that base under core gt default gt role_def package and the method plug in that we created earlier my_plug in are selected Save the new configuration by closing the editor window 10 Use the configuration selection pull down menu to select my basic configuration 11 Switch to the Browsing perspective and then open the Architect role in the
109. the work products in a process that has been created by adding tasks or roles to the process 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 200 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Method Plug in 1 Process Management 78 Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Create Delivery Processes Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element Properties View Activity Variability Types Rich Text Editor 9 3 Develop Work Breakdown Structures A work breakdown structure is a hierarchical breakdown of work such as activities tasks and steps defining a process Iterations Phases and Activities are Activity Types and each type can be transformed into another type using the Properties View Before creating a work breakdown structure be sure that the configuration selected in the tool bar is the same as the configuration selected as the default configuration for your process 177 178 179 180 File Edit Search Contiguration Window Help Weg my_new_contig wh oF LR ERS B Library amp N Ss my_seconddelivery_process lt My Plug in Delivery Process my_second_deliver Method
110. to Microsoft Project In method authoring the Process Engineer defines roles tasks work products and guidance in addition to the relationships between these elements In process authoring the Process Engineer defines additional lifecycle elements such as activities summary tasks phases iterations and milestones which can then be used to compose the core elements into processes A complete process corresponding to a project plan or a phase is a delivery process The OpenUp process is an example of a delivery process We can also create smaller more granular sections of process termed capability patterns which can be used as building blocks to compose delivery processes more easily Each time a task is included in a process a copy of that task is created in the context of the process This is a task descriptor The same task can be included any number of times in the same process This allows for example the same OpenUp task to be included in every iteration within each OpenUp Phase A task descriptor can also modify the base task without actually changing the task For example roles and work products can be added or suppressed steps can be suppressed or re sequenced Roles and work products are also included in processes as role descriptors and work product descriptors Roles and work products can also be customised to fit with the context of the process in which they are used Process Diagrams EPF Composer provides three
111. to begin the import process 5 Specify the location of your backup file The backup is a copy of your library before the merge takes place You have the option to Skip the backup if you want 6 You will be prompted when the import is complete You will have the option to inspect the error log Click OK Related topics Export a Method Plug in Import a Library Configuration Import XML 10 7 Export XML Method library content can be exported in XML format You can choose to export the entire method library or select individual method plug ins for export It is also possible to import method library content in XML format if the data follows the correct XML schema You can download the latest XML schema from eclipse org Due to the complexity of an import operation and its impact on a method library s integrity it is a good practice for third party vendors to export their library content in XML format and use the Import wizard to import the XML into a new or existing method library 34 Method plug ins can be exported This provides a convenient way to distribute method content to other users 35 Method content previously exported including by Rational Method Composer as an XML file can be re imported An imported XML file will become a method plug in with a configuration 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 244 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made avai
112. to extend base method content associated with a role using Extends and Replaces variability To extend and replace a role 1 Switch back to the Authoring perspective 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 77 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 2 Create a new content package in my_plug in Name the new content package extend_and_replace_test Save your changes by closing the editor panel 3 Create a new role in the content package that we just created 4 Use these attributes for the new role Name my_extend_replace_tester Presentation name My Extend and Replace Tester Brief description My extend and replace brief description Main description My extend and replace main description 5 Use the Variability Type menu to select Extends and Replaces then click the Select button in this section The Select Dialog Roles window opens 6 Select tester to be the base role Click OK to save changes and close the selection window 7 Save your changes by closing the role editor panel 8 Update my basic configuration by doing the following a Double click the my basic contiguration icon in the Library view panel The configuration editor opens b In the Plug in and Package Selection tab expand my_p ug in gt M
113. types of process diagrams 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 80 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Activity diagrams These diagrams show the subordinate activities in a higher level activity They also show the sequence relationships between those activities Activity detail diagrams These diagrams show tasks in an activity with their performing roles along with input and output work products Activity detail diagrams are similar to workflow detail diagrams Work product dependency diagrams These diagrams illustrate work product dependencies on other work products All three types of diagrams are generated and synchronised with the associated work breakdown structure Changes to the process structure using the diagram editor will be automatically reflected in the work breakdown structure 4 4 2 Browse Process Content The goal of this exercise is to gain a basic understanding of processes To browse process content 1 Switch to the Browsing perspective 2 From the configuration menu in the main tool bar click my basic configuration If you do not have this configuration go back and complete the Add a plug in to a configuration exercise in the Create method content tutorial 3 Inthe Configuration view panel expand the
114. using Extends and Replaces variability 4 3 1 Concepts This page provides background information required to complete the exercises in this tutorial In this tutorial we will use a powerful mechanism for reusing and customising existing content called method content variability The original content will not be affected by our operations however we will build upon it as a base for defining our new content Then we will demonstrate that modifications to the base content are automatically inherited by variable content in dependent plug ins When the resulting configuration is published as a Web site or exported all of our customisation will be resolved into a single resource There are four types of method content variability and in this tutorial we will use all of them to customise existing content The following are the four ways for using method content variability Contributes Extends Replaces Extends and Replaces 4 3 2 Contribute to a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend a role by adding a contribution To contribute to a role 1 Switch to the Authoring perspective if you are not already using it 2 Expand my_plug in until you see the Content Packages node Right click this node to create a new content package called Contribution Test Save your changes by closing the editor window after you have named the new content package 3 Expand the newly created content package and right click the Roles folde
115. want to contribute to the activity becomes local and appears in black 3 Right click the activity that has had its status changed to locally contributes and add new elements as required Related topics Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Local Replacement Local Replacement and Deep Copy 9 7 3 2 Local Replacement You cannot modify add or delete elements to an extended capability pattern If you need to replace the local tasks in an extended activity you first have to apply Local Replacement 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 214 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To replace elements of an activity in an extended capability pattern 1 Locate the activity s parent element or parent s parent and so forth until you reach the top level in green meaning the top parent of the extended activity i openup lifecycle 53 Presentation Name I Predecess Model Info Type Plan 3 amp OpenUP Litecycle 0 Delivery L a Inception Phase 1 Phase 4 S Inception Iteration 1 n extends ince Tleralion a Litecyde Objectives Milestone Wy 2 Milestone i 1 M Laboration Phase 18 17 11 Phase w Flabo
116. will add some capability patterns to the delivery process that you created in the previous lesson First we will copy a capability pattern and then we will extend a capability pattern To add a capability pattern using Copy 1 Switch to the Authoring perspective and open the My DP delivery process that you created earlier in this tutorial 2 Inthe Configurations view expand Processes gt Capability Patterns gt Management 3 Drag and drop the Plan and Manage Iteration capability pattern onto the Inception phase in My DP delivery process A menu opens prompting you to select Copy Extend or Deep Copy 4 Select Copy 5 Expand Plan and Manage Iteration capability pattern to the task descriptor level Note that the task descriptor names are displayed in black This indicates that the tasks are available for you to edit Note Any future changes to the capability pattern will not be propagated to your process You can edit the task in the Properties view 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 85 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To add a capability pattern using Extends 6 Create a new phase in the My DP delivery process Right click the first row with My DP and select New Child gt Phase Call the phase Elaboration 7 Crea
117. you to create a graphical workflow for your activities To assign method content to your process you then have the choice of working in different process views work breakdown structure work product usage or team allocation view Each view supports a different approach for creating a process You can define the work to be done define the results to be produced or define responsibilities for your roles If requested the editor updates the other process views semi automatically using wizards that prompt you for decisions on selecting method content elements 3 4 Method Configurations Overview EPF Composer offers a library containing a great deal of reusable content Its includes the OpenUp method framework and various plug ins extending OpenUp with domain specific additions such as development for concrete technologies such as J2EE or different development circumstances such as adopting a commercial off the shelf system COTS No organisation or project requires all of this documentation all at once but would work with a selection of specific subsets 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 32 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer EPF Composer manages for that purpose so called method configurations which allow you to specify working sets of c
118. your needs for authoring and reusing content 6 10 Create a Method Content Package A method Content Package is a container for method elements such as Roles Tasks Work Products and Guidance All Method Content Packages are contained in Method Plug ins When you reuse content created and managed by others you should always create a new Method Content Package and Method Content Elements in a Method Plug in A method content package is a container for method elements Elements are organised in method packages to structure a large scale of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse Method content elements provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customised to specific types of projects All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 136 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer that you yourself produc
119. 0 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 172 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Replaces Variability Contributes Variability 7 4 5 Associations Impacted by Variability The following table shows all possible associations between method content elements that can be impacted by variability Outgoing associations are shown with a right arrow Incoming associations are shown with a left arrow lt Unless noted in the table all associations are many to many For example there can be many associations from a Guidance element to another Guidance element The few exceptions are noted with a 1 next to the arrow indicating that only one association is allowed in that direction For example there can be only one incoming association from a Task primary performer to a Role Similarly there can be only one outgoing association from a Task to a Role primary performer Table 6 Variability associations Association Element direction Associated element Guidance Section Any method content element Any standard category Guidance Custom category Guidance Guidance Practice Tool Tool Mentor Guidance Checklist Check Item Guidance Practice Any category Any meth
120. 1 Sharing Content Using Version Control Systems Contents Using CVS to Share Libraries and Elements Version Control Reference for Specific Files Using Rational ClearCase 11 1 Using CVS to Share Libraries and Elements Contents Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS m Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to CVS Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 1 Install and Configure CVS CVS assumes an optimistic usage model in which multiple users make changes to files simultaneously However because compare and merge operations are not supported the CVS Watch Edit function should be used to broadcast notifications to other users who may be working on files concurrently To install CVS 1 Select Window gt Preferences 2 Expand the tree menu for Team on the left side of the Preferences window and then expand the CVS sub menu 3 Click Watch Edit Set the Watch Edit check boxes as follows CVS Watch Edit Select Configure projects to use Watch Edit on checkout When read only files are modified in an editor Select Send a CVS edit notification to the server Before a CVS edit notification is sent to the server Select Always prompt Update edited files Select Prompt to update if out of date 4 Click OK 238 Concurrent Versions System CVS also known as the Concurrent Versioning System 8 Ma
121. 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 187 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Method Configurations Overview 8 3 1 Create Custom Categories Custom categories can be used to compose publishable navigation views and to provide additional information for method and process elements To create a custom category 1 In the Library view of the Authoring Perspective open the Method Content folder in the method plug in where you want to create the custom category 2 Tocreate a top level category right click the Custom Categories folder and click New gt Custom Category 3 Enter the name presentation name brief description and other descriptive information about the custom category in the Description tab 4 Check the Publish this category with the categorised method elements box if you want to see the category presentation name to be listed on each page of the categorised element 5 Under the Assign tab select the items to include in the custom category Select individual method content elements process elements standard categories or other custom categories In some editors such as the role editor the custom category is also available to add to individual elements on the Categories tab 6 After you assign content to the custom ca
122. Configuration re Other 6 The New Method Plug in wizard opens 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 131 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer New Method Plug in ok Create a new method plug in Specify a name and provide general information about the new method plug in Ar Name new_plug in Brief description Authors Referenced Plug ins Finish Cancel 7 Inthe Name field type a name for your new method plug in 8 Provide a Brief description of the method plug in and a list of its Authors to help you and others keep track of the method plug ins in the library You can return to edit this information at any time 9 Inthe Referenced Plug ins field select one or more method plug ins As a result your plug in will be an extension to the referenced plug ins This allows you to reuse content from the selected method plug ins extending them with your own content If this is the first method plug in in the library the field will be disabled 10 Click Finish Your new method plug in is in the Library View with the other method plug ins and the method plug in editor opens You can open the method plug in editor any time by double clicking the method plug in in the Library view 8 Ma
123. Content Content Packages General Information Standard Categories Provide general information about this delivery pro S Custom Categories Name my laai i L Proresses Stipe A 5a Capability Patterns a my second delivery process i Delivery Processes ii j a my_delivery_process_package pias ption my_second_delivery_process my_first_delivery_process va Purpose All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those control
124. Contribute to a Work Product The goal of this exercise is to extend a work product by adding a contribution To contribute to a work product 1 Switch to the Authoring perspective if you are not already using it 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 68 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 2 In my plugin under the contribution_test folder right click Work Products and select New gt Artefact 3 Give the new artefact the following attributes Name my_contributing_test_case Presentation Name My Contributing Test Case Brief description Contributing Brief Description Purpose Contributing Purpose Main description Contributing Main Description 4 Use the Variability Type menu to select Contributes then click Select to the right of Base in this section The Select Dialog Artefacts window opens 5 Select test_case and click OK to close this window You can find this under core tech common exten_supp gt technical_work_products 6 Save your changes by closing the editor 7 Switch back to the Browsing perspective Make sure that you are using my basic configuration 8 Use the Configuration view to open Work Product Kinds gt Uncategorised then locate Test Case 9 Click the Test Case icon to
125. EF Browsing Ef 8 Configuration 53 E Content CA E my basic configuration Disciplines ee Domains G8 Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets Tools Lg Processes Custom Categories Bci iy L Guidance Extends OpenUP Build Design Developer Test Implementation SS F My extended role brief description H 3 Basic Roles Extends Developer amp My Design acs Uncategorized Roles Expand All Sections H Collapse All Sections Extends OpenUP Develope 2 responsible for B B 2 Developer Back to top My extended role description gt Back to top aa 4 3 6 Extend a Work Product The goal of this exercise is to customise a base method work product using Extends variability 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 73 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To extend a work product 1 2 o Nog Switch back to the Authoring perspective In the Library view under extends_test content package create a new work product of type artefact Use these attributes for the new artefact Name my_extends_design Presentation name Extends Design Brief description Extends Design Brief Description Use the Variability type m
126. EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer synchronisation Note that you can only change the behaviour of elements that are not marked read only Custom synchronisation Custom synchronisation at the activity level synchronises the activity descriptors by bringing in the task descriptor s associations Right click any activity that has descriptors and click Custom Synchronisation 2 The Synchronization wizard opens up Use the wizard to select the properties of the method content that you want to be considered for synchronisation Synchronisation is based on the options that you select For example if you select only mandatory output work product then in task descriptor s properties view you should see only output work product and not input and optional work products 3 Click Finish Default synchronisation Default synchronisation at the activity level synchronise activities by bringing in the task descriptor s associations 1 Right click any activity that has descriptors and click Default Synchronisation from Method Content This will bring in all default associations of the task descriptors 2 Click OK Related topics Process Management Use of Descriptors in Processes Create Method Content Elements Create Guidance Elements 9 10 Working with Process Diagrams You can create process diagrams to illustrate the relationships between processes elements When you publish a method Web site you can choose wheth
127. Eclipse Process Framework EPF Composer Installation Introduction Tutorial and Manual EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Table of Contents 1 EPF COMPOSER DOWNLOAD AND INSTALLATION 7 Des MD OWMlO AG EE sasethcensevt T E ETE O 7 1 2 Anstallatim ciinii iiini aeina A EATE adden see ed aoe 9 LS COMMS UPAt OM essien eenarniiieie tan ea E A EEEE E E AAEE ANERE REA 10 2 METHOD CONTENT DOWNLOAD AND INSTALLATION 12 D Ace tAMOCUCHOM PAE te ednavereeshssvacesunodsoseeeantauducevowetessotdosanestacnsrsh TE 12 2 2 EPF Dowload Sites civic cies ccdeescivalivva cadecioces dvteadeaibens seivessaidvasstadiacssnieoouad addessentdecsaiats 12 OAP e sss 5 ceveasedeascencs E E E den ce destactewsauescasnstdstextacecaseduiss 13 222 SSPEY PLAC UCES cerimana resets vacen ae cangseestocesccs Sau genters coiceevaceuats coset EE TE 14 Dede OPOMUP a teeth cesseeiscts tea E E cds shale Get mse EE 16 224 Other LiDrarses ros vezssccs cs hecceees E teeesnasotesscaslen as E EEEE 16 2 35 gt Other Download Sites vescvasscccccssessecaessecevedscnteceessdacvensaadedeesasteeudanseccesssicavesad cecteedandaeesancas 16 TOGAF17 24 Switching Method Libraries wissciigsia ssiccciassasedeceg reenen onnee NERENS ENE AEN 22 3 INTRODUCTION 25 3 1 EPP Composer OvervieW csscesgisviissnenii oneei oean a ai 25 3 2 Method Content Authoring Overview esesssssesseesresiesisrssrrrrssresresresrerressesrissresresresres 30 3 3 Process AUthOrins OVervieWeesres
128. F9 Configuration evra TOGAF9 E Disciplines 98 Domains a Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets s Tools Processes Custom Categories L Problems amp 47ean a Guidance 0 errors 0 warnings 0 infos Description Resou Path Loca 2 4 Switching Method Libraries Start EPF and click on File gt Open gt Method Library The Open Method Library dialogue box opens Browse to select the folder with the library or with the editable copy of the original library files In this case we have selected D epf 29 composer epf_work_practices folder 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 22 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 18 Open Method Library One i Aethod t iDrary SN 2 J Open Method Library rf H Specify a path containing a method library Ly Path D epf composer epf_work_practices Browse __Cancel_ Then somewhat surprisingly the Copy Library dialogue box pops up again Figure 19 Copy Library Cars l dArar a fm Co JY Livia y re The library you are opening is a default library supplied with the composer We highly recommend that you make a working copy of this library for editing Enter a location and library name for the new library and cl
129. Framework C zim Edit Search Configuration Wi New gt Open gt Close Ctri w s Close All Ctrl Shift w H Save Ctri s IR A ave As Save Al Ctri Shift 5 22g Export Exit The result is the following window 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 18 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 14 Import Source Type Select Import one or more method plug ins Select an import source E Library Configuration Method Plug ins XM You will have to navigate to the Method Plug in folder 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 19 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 15 Import Directory lt Import Method Plug ins OE3 Specify import directory Specify the directory containing the method plug ins to import Directory D epf composer TOGAF Export Import option Check base plug ins Ignore and remove unresolved references Having clicked on Next gt then another screen appears 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved
130. Implementation Technical Architecture Technical Specification Technical Test Results Architecture Notebook Build Design Developer Test Glossary Implementation Iteration Plan My Navigation Map My UI Prototype Project Plan Risk List System Wide Requirements Test Case Test Log Test Script Use Case Use Case Model Vision Work Items List S L Role Sets eB Basic Roles a My Design a s Uncategorized Roles ER Tools il miy 4 Processes j e Custom Categories Guidance t t 4 3 Reuse Method Content This tutorial contains a summary of background information followed by eight guided exercises 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 64 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Learning objectives Upon completion of this tutorial you should be able to do the following Gain an overview of method content variability and how it promotes reuse of method content Customise method content in an existing method plug in by using the contributes variability mechanism Customise method content by using the extends variability mechanism Customise method content by using the replaces variability mechanism Customise method content by using the extends and replaces variability mechanism
131. Line Style amp prad amp proo Select All amp publi Arrange All 8 at Align Order ji Auto Size Make Same Size Filters gt al o View my_ Zoom SEAM 4s Pio gt 3 R E wF 8 When you modify a diagram a symbol is displayed left to the name of the diagram tab indicating that it needs to be saved There are four ways to save it Close the diagram tool and click Yes in response to the question about saving the changes m Click one of the disk icons all or current in the toolbar Use the shortcut Ctrl s m Click File gt Related topics Save Process Authoring Overview Method Configurations Overview 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 232 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Create Capability Patterns Create Delivery Processes Working with Process Diagrams Working with Activity Diagrams Working with Activity Detail Diagrams Publish Diagrams 222 9 10 4 Publish Diagrams When you publish your configuration you may want to include some or all of your process diagrams By default every diagram that you create is published but you can choose not to publish a particular diagram You can control which diagrams are publi
132. Local Replacement and Deep Copy Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element Properties View The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 21 S While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 213 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 9 7 3 1 Local Contribution You cannot modify add or delete elements to an extended capability pattern If you need to add supplementary local tasks to an extended activity you first have to change the status of the extended activity to Local Contribution To add elements to an activity in an extended capability pattern 1 Locate the activity s paren
133. Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 188 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 9 Click the Views tab and then click Add View The Select Categories window opens The Select Categories window opens all the standard and custom categories in the configuration 10 Select one or more categories to include as a view in your configuration and click OK The view display provides a preview of how the view is displayed in the published tree browser 11 Select a view to display as the default start up view in the published Web site and click Make Default 12 To save the configuration click File gt Save or close the configuration editor and click Yes when prompted to save the changes Related topics Authoring Perspective Configuration View Method Content Categories Custom Categories Method Configurations Overview 8 3 2 Modify Custom Categories To edit a custom category 1 Inthe Library view of the Authoring Perspective right click the custom category that you want to edit and select Edit The element opens in the method content editor Tip You can also access the method element editor by double clicking the custom category you want to edit 2 Edit the content of the custom category When finished you can modify the
134. Method Content a Content Packages BA CD_my_new_content C5 Roles Tasks 6 Work Products TOGU New amp Checklist ie New Method Plug in 3 Secon n 5 Example gt Standard ideli Disdpl A Guideline og Domai B Co ae Estimation Considerations ig i33 Work bd aberi OB Role S x A ee A Tools Reusable Asset Custom amp Roadmap 5 Processes Refresh B Supporting Material fe Capability eacerrrs i Template Sa Delivery Processes Term Definition Configurations Tool Mentor i Whitepaper The fourteen guidance element types Checklist Concept Example Guideline Estimation Consideration Practice Report Reusable Asset Roadmap Supporting Material Template Term Definition Tool Mentor and White Paper Adding guidance is an easy way to tailor information for specific projects For example a type of Guidance called a Guideline can be associated to a Work Product that explains how your project uses that Work Product For more information about attaching Guidance elements to specific types of elements see Variability Associations 12 The core content of activities is task descriptors and the steps of which they are composed In addition activities also contain role descriptors work product descriptors and milestones 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 106 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under t
135. PF Eclipse Process Framework Composer File Usage plugin xmi There is one plugin xmi file for each plug in This file contains a reference to every content element in the plug in in addition to the presentation names brief descriptions and relationships for each element such as guidance inputs or outputs tasks performing role tasks work products responsible for role and so on It also contains the definition of what is included in each standard category in addition to the definition and contents of each custom category s When more than one person works on a plug in you need to be especially careful about coordinating changes to this file and any files that it references method content element xmi There is one file per method content element It contains the descriptive text for the method content element for all fields except the name presentation name and brief description The file name lt method content element gt is the same as the name field for the element One exception to this if you create a second method content element with the same name and that element is located in the same directory in your library EPF Composer will append 2 to the end of the actual file name The appended 2 will not appear in the name field model xmi There is one model xmi file for each process capability pattern or delivery process This file contains a reference to the
136. PF Composer This integration protects users from unexpected file conflicts when performing actions that involve multiple files For example if a local file is out of date relative to the server EPF Composer will detect this conflict and generate a warning In this situation users should heed the warnings and update their library appropriately The safest way to ensure that files with cross dependencies are kept in sync with one another is to update the entire library Do not simply refresh the individual element that is out of sync The following table describes the impact of common actions on specific files managed by a version control system 267 TBM Rational ClearCase can be integrated with EPF Composer if a properly configured Rational ClearCase server is available 268 Precautions are needed when multiple users attempt to modify the same files at the same time 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 256 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Table 11 Impact of common actions on files managed by Rational ClearCase Action Impact Comments Create a new plug in A directory is created and added to version control A plugin xmi is created in the new plug in directory and added to version control a The library x
137. Processes folder and then expand Capability Patterns gt Phase Iteration Templates Click the Inception Phase Iteration icon 4 A capability pattern contains a large amount of information is displayed over four tabs Description Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation Work Product Usage Explore the information on each tab 5 To view a delivery process expand Processes gt Delivery Processes gt Open Up Lifecycle gt Inception Phase gt Inceptions Iteration 1 n Click Initiate Project The display for a delivery process is similar to a capability pattern 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 81 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 Configuration 3 amp ee my basic configuration Disciplines Domains Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets 4 Tools S Processes fa Capability Patterns fa Delivery Processes amp OpenUP Lifecycle BS Inception Phase z fS Inception Iteration 1 n B9 Initiate Project BY Pian and Manage Steration BF identify and Refine Requirements BY Agree on Technical Approach l Lifecycle Objectives Milestone BS Elaboration Phase By Construction Phase Transition Phase P Custom Categories Fes Guidance 4 4 3 Create a Delivery Process The goal of this e
138. Sections E Collapse All Sections Purpose The purpose of this task is to describe the elements of the system so that they support the required behavior are of high quality and fit within the architecture B Project Management Bl Requirements Bl Test Back to top BR Uncategorized Tasks Domains Relationships E E Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets Roles Primary Performer Additional Performers H E Tools e Developer e Analyst CS Processes e Extends OpenUP Developer e Architect E G Custom Categories a L Guidance Mandatory Optional e Technical Architecture e Design e Architecture Notebook e Technical Specification 4 3 8 Replace a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend base method content associated with a role using Replaces variability To replace a role 1 Switch back to the Authoring perspective 2 Create a new content package in my_p ug in Name the new content package replace_test Save your changes by closing the editor panel 3 Create a new role in the content package that we just created 4 Use these attributes for the new role Name my_replace_tester Presentation name My Replace Tester Brief description My replaced brief description Main description My replaced main description 5 Use the Variability type menu to select Replaces then click Select to the rig
139. Switch to the Browsing perspective and click Processes gt Delivery Processes then double click My DP The Work Breakdown Structure tab is displayed 13 Expand Inception gt Requirements and click on Detail System Wide Requirements Only the first step Detail system wide requirements from the core method task is included f The Properties View is the editor for activities task descriptors roles descriptors and work product descriptors contained in processes 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 84 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer BA Content Ef Kd ye Roe o Task Descriptor Detail System Wide Requirements This task details one or more requirement that does not N apply to a specific use case LA Based on Method Task Detail System Wide Requirements Lilt Expand All Sections A Collapse All Sections Relationships Expand All Steps A Collapse All Steps Detail system wide requirements Back to top 14 Make other changes to the tasks in the delivery process that you just created and see how they are reflected when you view the process in the browsing perspective 4 4 4 Use Capability Patterns The goal of this exercise is to create a new delivery process using capability patterns We
140. Time required The estimated time to complete this tutorial is about 2 hours Prerequisites Create method content tutorial Lessons in this module Concepts This page provides background information required to complete the exercises in this tutorial Contribute to a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend a role by adding a contribution Contribute to a Work Product The goal of this exercise is to extend a work product by adding a contribution Contribute to a Task The goal of this exercise is to extend a task by adding a contribution Extend a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend base method content associated with a role by using Extends variability Extend a Work Product The goal of this exercise is to customise a base method work product using Extends variability Extend a Task The goal of this exercise is to extend a base method content associated with a task by using Extends variability Replace a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend base method content associated with a role using Replaces variability 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 65 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Extend and Replace a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend base method content associated with a role
141. a graphical model from a design tool with textual information documents Reusable asset A reusable asset provides a solution to a problem for a given context The asset has rules for usage which are the instructions describing how the asset should be used Roadmap A roadmap is a specific type of guidance that describes how a process is typically performed Often processes can be much easier understood by providing a walkthrough of a typical instance of the process In addition to making the process practitioner understand how work in the process is being performed a roadmap provides additional information about how activities and tasks relate to each other over time Role A role is a well defined set of related skills competencies and responsibilities Roles can be filled by one person or multiple people One person may fill several roles Roles perform tasks 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 272 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Role set A role set is used to group roles with certain commonalities together For example in a software development environment an Analyst role set could be used to group together roles such as Business Process Analyst System Analyst and Requirements Specifier Each of these roles work with similar
142. a text or HTML file that contains the text that will be displayed when the user presses About in the published site Feedback URL For more information about the feedback URL see page Changing Feedback Addresses 8 Select options for Glossary and Index 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 238 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Check the option boxes for glossary and or index to generate a Glossary and Index section 9 Select options for Look and Feel Publish banner Check this box to create a banner on top of the published content Use the Banner image field to select a graphic file that contains your banner If you do not enter anything here EPF Composer will use its default banner 10 Select options for Validation Check external hyperlinks When this option is selected EPF Composer checks all hyperlinks before publishing Clear this option if you are not connected to the Internet or need to use a Proxy server currently not supported Convert broken hyperlinks to plain text If the Check external hyperlinks finds broken links and the corresponding option is not selected EPF Composer prefixes each link with a broken link symbol The same is true for links to content elements that are not in the published method configura
143. abs Appearance Rulers amp Grid and Advance tabs with options for editing the diagram d By letting the mouse hover over the surface of the diagram itself will produce a special fleeting horizontal window which let you select and add different A types of objects B amp 2G Aw SB o e By right clicking the surface of the diagram a window pops up which lets you add nodes and activities objects notes and text 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 231 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer System Wide Requirements D gt Technical Specification Add File vey cont Use Case PRE By Select ai 3 Arrange All o E Filters Vision te ERA tuse Cas Model Views i Zoam 2 Refresh R Eo t Bo WP Excercise K Delete Diagram m Show Properties View Ley Glossary gt EI x I Work Product Descriptor Note Oval Triangle amp Rectangle Diamond Pentagon Hexagon Oxtegen Ge shadow Rectangle i Rounded Rectangle 3D Redange A Cylinder f In the menu toolbar click Diagram to have access to multiple sets of functionality File Edit Diagrary Search Configuration Wi ey A Font _ amp Fill Color Library J Line Color cs D n amp mett _
144. ackages in a method library 52 Method libraries can be comprised of content from many types of methods and whole families of different processes A method configuration defines a logical subset of a method library You use method configurations to define the scope of your authoring work and when publishing or exporting content 5 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 54 A method content package is a container for method elements Elements are organised in method packages to structure a large scale of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse 55 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 143 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To search content using the Method Search use one of the following search criteria Text Type a string in the text field to search all documentation fields for the method content and processes Method element name or presentation name patte
145. agrams are suitable for activities that consist of only child tasks You can create activity detail diagrams by using the Diagram editor and you can include diagrams that are created by other applications 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 226 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Capability Patterns or Delivery Processes node and select the process that contains the activity that the diagram will model 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Click the Work Breakdown Structure tab and select the activity to be modelled by the diagram by right clicking the item 5 Select Diagrams gt Open Activity Detail Diagram from the pop up menu The editor is enabled only if the activity contains tasks descriptors You can also specify your own diagram image to use for this diagram by selecting Diagrams gt User Defined Diagrams my basic configuration x E iea S E Authoring Bee a N gt 100 eh Library ES My DP 12S Activity Detail Requirements My DP t a Palette 8 oxe i D Select amp meth_momt Systorn Zoom 5 oractice HAEA Note J i mpr S Geometric Shapes
146. akdown structure Activities in addition to phases and iterations can be nested inside each other according to how each relates in the hierarchy 3 Review the list of work products in the Configuration View In this view work products are sorted by domain and work product kinds Drill into either of these hierarchies to see which work products are available in this configuration 4 Select a work product to add to the activity and then drag it on top of the activity to which you want it to belong The work product is added as a work product descriptor to that activity If the work product is an output to one or more tasks in the configuration a wizard opens prompting you to add the task 188 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 189 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 1 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the
147. al_work_products A vision Brief Description This concept introduces what visual modeling is and its benefits 6 Use the same process to add my_create_physical_appearance_checklist as an additional guidance item 7 Click the Preview tab to view your work 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 59 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Artifact My Navigation Map The Navigation Map expresses the structure of the user interface elements in the system along with their potential navigation pathways Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections There is one Navigation Map per system The purpose of the Navigation Map is to express the principal user interface paths through the system These are the main pathways through the screens of the system and not necessarily all of the possible paths It can be thought of as a road map of the system s user interface The Navigation Map makes it easy to see how many clicks it will take a user to get to a specific screen Back to top Relationships Roles Responsible Modified By e My Ul Designer e My Ul Designer Tasks Input To Output From e My Prototype User e My Design User Interface Interface Back to top More Information Checklists e My Create Physi
148. als are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Standard categories provide a means to categorise core method content in line with best practices for creating structured methods To encourage good method structure there are standard categories for grouping tasks into disciplines work products into domains roles into role sets and tool mentors into tools Unlike custom categories standard categories by definition are linked to a specific type of method content Method and process elements use two names Name and Presentation name It is good practice to use file names that are all lowercase with no spaces and no special characters The Name will be used as the name of the file that stores the element We do this so that the name is valid on all operating systems and for integration with version control software The name is shown in the Library view The presentation name is the name that is shown on published pages and in the configuration view This name can contain any uppercase characters spaces and special symbols such as the trademark symbol In the Library view you can choose to display names or presentation names You can switch the name display using the Show Presentation Names button in the library view toolbar 4 2 2 Create a Method Plug in The goal of this exercise is to create a new method plug in To create a method p
149. and Preview When you are working in the Authoring Perspective the window on the right side of your screen contains content editors that you can use to create or modify element types When the Browsing Perspective is open the window on the right contains a preview of your content as it will appear in a published Web site Related topics Authoring Perspective Browsing Perspective Library View Configuration View View Method Content Search for Content 6 2 Authoring Perspective The Authoring perspective provides views and functions to navigate and author method content and processes You must be in the Authoring perspective to create or modify any element types The Authoring perspective provides two views in separate panels the Library View and the Configuration View Double click any element in the Library View or Configuration View to open the editor panel on the right The editor panel contains several tabs through which you can edit information about the element you have selected Selecting the Authoring Perspective Ey Use the Open Perspective E menu in the main tool bar to select Authoring Ls tar Related topics Configuration View User Interface 7 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or
150. and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 230 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer a ie Ra WM 125 My DP amp Work Product Dependency Diagram Requirerents My DP 7 gis Palette 3 gt Select Technical Specification Niners Note l N Z Work Product Dependency i ae gt Work Product Descriptor Use Case gt Geometric Shapes x i Oval E gt S Vision ro fa Cylinder Use Case Modei W Rectangle Types 4 Polygon J Nine J gt E gt WP Fxcercise System Wide Requirements cebuana e Be Ss d 2 Glossary m Properties Fi he WA Font Colors Appearance a ond Color 7 B Rulers amp Grid i tet OD amp BS 7 There are multiple ways to access to the diagram editing options a Draw or modify the dependency diagram using the editor Palette You can set different options for the palette by right clicking in the palette area to access a pop up window with different options b There is a button bar on the top for editing You select the objects and click on the edit buttons to change the appearance c The activity diagram Properties view contains three t
151. arch 4 Expand the search results and double click an element The editor for the selected item is opened If you have Link with Editor F selected in the Library view the display will update to show you where the selected item is located in the library If the Link with Editor is not selected you can right click an element in the Search view and select Show In gt Library 5 Open the Search window again and repeat the same search but this time reduce the scope to look for Task elements only Clear all the other content types in the scope panel This time the search should be quicker and result in fewer hits 6 Open the Search window again and repeat the same search but this time use a wildcard like arch as a file name pattern Examine the results set 7 Experiment with other method searches 4 2 Create Method Content This tutorial contains a brief summary of key concepts followed by ten exercises In this tutorial you will create or modify content elements that will be used in subsequent tutorials For this reason we suggest that you complete all steps and use the exact names and text strings as described 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 44 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Learning objectives Upon completion of this t
152. ariability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional You can use variability to customise configurations that use method content and processes that you do not own and cannot directly modify When content packages are upgraded you can import them and reapply in a single step the customisation that you made earlier without going through each element Variability generally affects two characteristics of a method element its attributes and its relationships with other content elements If an element supports variability the specification is shown at the bottom of the element s Description view There are three factors to be considered when using variability Attributes Element data types such as Main Description Incoming associations Associations from other elements The associated element may have one or more references to the subject element Outgoing associations Associations to other elements The subject element may have one or more references to the associated element For a complete list of supported associations for each type of element see Associations Impacted by Variability Variability Type Variability type describes how one element affects another through variability associations The fiv
153. as part of an activity that is associated with a particular role These diagrams also show mandatory input and output work products for each task Activity detail diagrams are suitable for activities that consist of only child tasks You can create activity detail diagrams by using the Diagram editor and you can include diagrams that are created by other applications 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 235 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 10 Publish and Exporting Contents Publishing Configurations as Web Sites Export to Microsoft Project Export a Library Configuration Import a Library Configuration Export a Method Plug in Import a Method Plug in Export XML Import XML 10 1 Publish Configurations as Web Sites You can use the Publish Method Configuration wizard to generate a Web site based on a method configuration To publish a configuration as a Web site 1 In the menu toolbar click the Configuration menu and select 7 Publish Configuration gt ef Publish The Publish Method Configuration wizard opens 2 From the list of available configurations select the method configuration that you want to publish Click Next 3 The Publish Method Configuration wizard opens You can choose to pu
154. as the context menu that allow you to run validation operations on the method library for finding inconsistencies Show External ID fields in editors off by default When selected one extra name field will be displayed in element s form editor called External ID The content of this field will be published as a second name with every element where it is applied to Method gt Authoring gt Library View Options Use this page to choose the default element link type when dragging an element from the Library or Configuration view into a rich text editor field The choices are Method element default Method element with type prefix Method element with custom text Method gt Authoring gt Process Editor Use this page to show or hide columns in the Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation and Work Product Usage tabs of the Process editor Use the menu and the Add Remove Up and Down buttons to change the layout of all process editor tabs These changes also impact how the tree structure is published to HTML Only the columns that you select will be published in the order that you specify here You can also set the preference for switching to the process s default configuration when activating a Process editor The default is to prompt the user Inherit suppression states on by default When applying a 279 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or
155. ategory Assignment Category Variability 8 4 2 Modify Category Assignment The editor of each method content element has a Categories tab from which you can Assign Unassign or Order the relevant categories The correct standard category section s is presented in the tab together with the custom category section To modify a category assignment 8 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 9 Expand the folder node in the Library view panel for relevant method plug in and expand the Method Content and Content Packages folder 10 Expand the content package that contains the method content element you want to edit and double click the element or right click it and select Edit The content element editor opens 11 Click the Categories tab and click the Add button The Select Dialog with the relevant Category Type opens 12 If you have previously created content add your relevant categories Remember You can select multiple items by using Shift or Control key 13 Click OK Related topics Assign Category Category Variability 8 5 Category Variability Both standard and custom categories have variability types assigned to them Since all tutorials and help files are mum about this I will have to experiment to verify the effect I suspect that variability affects the method content elements that the categories are assigned not the categories themselves Since categories affect configurations and variability
156. atic prompts to place new method library files under source control Ability to identify and check out all files needed to complete a particular operation This is significant because the set of files impacted by an operation are not obvious Sometimes more than one file is involved For more information about version control see Version Control for Specific Files Simplified procedures for renaming and deleting files For more information about working with files see Deleting Files with ClearCase Consult the EPF Composer Help files for more information 26 CVS assumes an optimistic usage model in which multiple users make changes to files simultaneously However because compare and merge operations are not supported the CVS Watch Edit function should be used to broadcast notifications to other users who may be working on files concurrently 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 260 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 12 Appendix Contents Keyboard Shortcuts Method Parameters Alternate Help Browser Fonts Accessibility Accessibility Features EPF Composer User Roles and Tasks Open Questions 12 1 Keyboard Shortcuts For a complete list of standard keyboard shortcuts in Windows
157. blish the entire configuration or select only a few processes in the configuration 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 236 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer EPER Mathed Configuration Mex Select method configuration content Select the method configuration content to publish You cen choose to _ publish the entire contiguration or only a few select processes In the Publish the entire configuration Publish selected processes practice mgmt risk_value_lifecyde base E Capability Patterns 1S risk_value_lifecycle_ phases FI Delivery Processes t proves openup base s _ S amp Capability Patterns a Clia Delivery Processes 1 openup litecyde E my_plug in C163 Capability Patterns 5 4 Delivery Processes Iv My DP Publish referenced base processes 4 The selection of Publish referenced base processes most likely will have as a result that when activity variability relationships are established the referenced base process will be published in addition to the extending activity To verify 5 Click Next Another Publish Method Configuration wizard page opens 6 Select options to customise the look and behaviour of the published site 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All R
158. blish None 8 To select which diagrams are published you can set default options for activity and activity detail diagrams To set these options navigate to Window gt Preferences gt Method gt Publishing Browsing gt Activity Diagrams l Preferences og type filter text Activity Diagrams p General Help Activity Diagram Install Update C Publish acthaty disgrams for unmodified activity extensions Jaya Activity Detail Diagram Method J Publish actity detail diagrams that have not been created in process edtor Authoring f Ta Publishing Browsing POON F TOSE DAE fee 10 Diagrams Role Diagram Supporting Plugins Run Debug Tean Restore Defauits Apply Lax i cancel a Activity Diagram By default activities that are extensions of other activities are not published with their activity diagrams only their Breakdown Structure If the option Publish activity diagrams for unmodified activity extensions is selected however extending activities are published with the diagram of their base activities They will however only be published if the extending activities do not define their own sub elements that is if they are pure capability pattern applications without providing its own modifications If these activities define their own elements you should create a local activity diagram for the extending activity that will then be published b Activity Detail Diagram You can choose to generate activ
159. blish openup base from the list and click Finish This indicates that your plug in will be an extension to the OpenUp plug in Unified Process provides a repository of base content that you can supplement with your own content The new method plug in is now in the Library view panel on the left side of your screen It is not dimmed indicating that it is not locked and that you can edit it Library 2 eevro core tt practice 8 process E publish CE Configurations Fa To open the plug in editor double click my_p ug in actually once you click Finish on the wizard the editor opens automatically About halfway down the page you will see the Lock Plug in checkbox This is unchecked for your new plug in 4 2 3 Create a Content Package The goal of this exercise is to create a method content package for our new plug in To create a content package 1 In the Library view panel expand the tree node for my_p ug in by clicking the symbol and then expand the node for Method Content 2 Right click Content Packages and select New gt Content Package to create a new content package The content package editor opens 3 Name the package my_content_package with a Presentation name My Content Package and enter some text in the Brief description field 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 48 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available und
160. brary csissstes ccvsccsdeu otic chdeeisie blest Made detei shine ins EAEE eee 101 Did Method Plug if caeno ea eg aad cad E eeteis 101 3A Method Content FlGments tijicec ciscts schzess iuecauasotengasssubesites ia a 104 35 35 Guidance Elements ices seca sccsdestacetiscevetcvesens sd baaseniodcseeescedheaush uses bts cddlves soeaecetdeecvedunsaveie 105 5 6 Method Content Packages eniron ieena igrae aa a E ER a E a Eia 108 5 7 Method Content Variability irscssrsssrsissserassricirsssursiisireioiiarssii kaiini eiiis 110 5 8 Method Content Categories 0 0 ceecescescsseceseeeseeeeeeesseeeseeesaecaaeceaecsaeesseeeeeseeesseeeees 112 5 9 Method Comm eurationss ssicss icseccecsciessscasadevagessieessgdebeese satel seas sspenageiavaea dedaigenseevedenesiseone 114 5 10 Process Management cc s csie s ccdsccsasschcessssdsraes asnicgdesetecties sca sseuebsveused sous EO a ES 116 521021 Process Description saien kirse erise ee E tenses REEE E sh ta dbanatedscebsa EEE E EREE EPERE 116 5 102 Process VIEWS seoreiiiosi g nn e E AA eA Garters ee AA 116 5 10 3 Capability Patterns and Delivery Processes ssseeesesesesseesssreeresrrrrerrsreeresrerresreerssesreeresre 117 5 10 4 Process and Default Configuration sssesssseessereeesterreresreerrsterrssterreresrenresresresrenrseenreeresre 117 5 10 3 Process PACK Aes icc is vecstecsberisk n R tenet E A R i 118 5 10 65 Process Dia STATIS pnsca ee E EE E sb eeediveeaess gest 119 S 10 7 DESPOT i o
161. cal Appearance Checklist Concepts e Visual Modeling Back to top Description Guidance Categories 8 Go back to the Guidance editor and remove the concept Visual Modelling 9 Click the Preview tab to view your work 4 2 10 Create a Standard Method Category The goal of this exercise is to create a new standard method category 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 60 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Standard method categories tend to be relatively stable When you are creating a method plug in that extends an existing method you should try to use the standard categories before creating new ones You will therefore relatively rarely create new standard method categories Standard method categories are predefined and provide means to categorise method content in line with best practices for creating structured methods Standard categories are linked to specific types of method content disciplines are assigned to tasks role sets groups roles domains and work products kinds are for work products and tool mentors are assigned to tools Each standard method category can only contain its specified type of method content disciplines can only contain tasks for example To create a standard category 1 Under Standard Categories
162. cbt EE ASR E ES SET 52 ADTs Work WIth Steps neurean e e E E E deusdac E E E ke eeecie ds 55 4 2 8 Create Guidance Elements esis ss ccscccvestaceesecssvaccesssvsscdeosccsuvedevsocecsccorctveved AEAEE EEEE E 57 4 29 Apply Guidance xccscsin estes tsetse E E AE A E eee eas 58 4 2 10 Create a Standard Method Category 0 cece cee ceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecssecaecuecaesaeeeaeeeneeeas 60 4 2 11 Add a Method Plug in to a Configuration eee eeeeeeesceeeceeeeesecesecesecsaecsaecseesaeeeaeeeneeees 62 4 3 Reuse Method Comtemt cecci2iiceecteccsseothiveseuts cxnnsbdadeeigeds Casas sa ian senate casteidadheeghaseacdeadsdivondes 64 43 1 Conc pisicincissi dieiininiiinniide skis ei E E nia 66 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 2 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 4 3 2 Contribute toa Roles ienero ea E diaiaas aii deen meas eae 66 4 3 3 Contribute to a Work Product eee eee cee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseceaecaecsaecsaecsaecaeecaeseneseaeeeeeeeeees 68 43 4 Contribute to a Task ii cscincivscbacissccs iedvctesssbansesoes daascenstess cedsesshavinssstavdedseneeuevses sonceontesvevenseys 70 4 3 5 Extend a Roless siccseis iii neki dein ee od Sin ea 72 4 3 6 Extenda Work Productisscc cccsscastiisccechitsccs sevepese seinb ecu a eN E EE 73 43 7 Exte
163. cceusatars sve lossecceatesavacwesas Re eE OEE iE Ea E E aE 263 12 21 Method Parameters scissione ea eeens arorik e SEKER S TE E a Eee is i a ERr Sie AEREO 263 12 2 2 Altermate Help Browser sisi cciccccieiisies iicisvasvecssensvbascesdecesocnsieessebatesvoedinbeadevsevstevaseeensensventoot 266 T22 3r EONS coiesvisesvcesscesetansousveunsceshlevacesuvayecesveupscedvecusubaceesseabncavnaneveanbesauepeedadesdouavensecbsndesveadvenneess 266 2 24 Accessibility oncion e E E EEEE R AEO RETE Ei 267 1222 5 Accessibility Feat ros ciriciri oare E E E RREO EE E r ai 267 12 3 EPF Composer User Roles and Tasks 00 eeeceesesseeereeeseeeseeeaecaeceaeeeseeseesseeseneeees 268 13 GLOSSARY 270 14 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 275 14 1 Document Details cscs ccutedccvetacsutecs ssndeavticotacesasdcceuds ssusieested deed icazsevessalevsdicaelevestaddenssss 275 14 2 Document History cee eeeessecssecsseceseceeeceseceseeeseeeeaeeeseecaeecsaecsaecsaecsaeesaeesseeseeeesneeees 275 14 3 Author and REVIEWETS sierstenen gr eenn E EE eeke esiri 275 14 4 Copyright Statement cisnes ci aaiae iaeia 275 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 6 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 1 EPF Composer Download and Installation The EPF Composer is a stand alone application using the
164. ce and so on Guidance can be added to most method and process elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 120 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Process Authoring Overview Capability Pattern Reuse Create Capability Patterns 25 Create Delivery Processes 5 A delivery process describes a complete and integrated approach for performing a specific type of project A delivery process describes what is produced how it is produced and the required staffing for the entire project lifecycle 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 121 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 Getting Started with Method Authoring Contents User Interface Authoring Perspective Browsing Perspective m Library View m Configuration View m View Method Content Open an Existing Method Library Create a New Method Library Create a Method Plug in Create a Method Content Package Create a Method Configuration Copy a Method Configuration Search for Content 6 1 User Interface The
165. chitecture Development OpenUP Disciplines Project Management Requirements Test gt Create Test Cases D Implement Tests gt Run Tests E Uncategorized Tasks EGR Domains GE Work Product Kinds amp CS Role Sets E BB Basic Roles Analyst fz Any Role 3 Architect 3 Developer 3 Project Manager a Stakeholder My Extend and Replace Tester A My Design cS Uncategorized Roles A m a D 6 f BS AS AS fate BS AS m IB Content A EE KEA Implement Test Scripts to validate a Build of the solution Organize Test Scripts into suites and collaborate to ensure appropriate depth and breadth of test feedback Disciplines Test Expand All Sections E Collapse All Sections To implement step by step Test Scripts that demonstrate the solution satisfies the requirements Back to top Relationships Additional Performers e Analyst e Developer e Stakeholder Primary Performer e My Extend and Replace Tester Roles Mandatory e Test Case Optional e Test Script e Software Imnlementatinn Inputs m This lesson concludes the Reuse method content tutorial Proceed with next tutorial Working with processes 4 4 Work with Processes This tutorial contains a summary of key concepts followed by five exercises Learning objectives Upon completion of this tutorial you should be able to do the foll
166. click Capability Patterns and select New and a choice comes up between creating a new Process Package or a new Capability Pattern Right click Delivery Processes the choice comes up between creating a new Process Package or a Delivery Process Process Packages can be created both under Capability Patterns and under Delivery Processes New Capability Patterns can be created both directly under Capability 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 118 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Patterns and under any Process Package New Delivery Processes can be created both directly under Delivery Processes and under any Process Package Process Packages is used in the EPF Composer as a grouping concept and it is not clear if they have a role beyond providing visual groupings Capability Patterns Delivery Processes and Process Packages Library Eyi pi_my_new_plug_in Method Content gt Processes Sa Capability Patterns My First Process Package gt my_second_capability_pattern 8 my_first_capability_pattern 40 Delivery Processes gt 3 My Second Process Package H my_second_delivery_process amp my_first_delivery_process 3 Configurations EJ my_new_config 5 10 6 Process Diagrams EPF Compos
167. click OK 8 Click the Guidance tab and click Add The Select Dialog Guidance window opens Under Visual Modelling Guidance select using_visual_modeling and click OK 9 Click the Categories tab and click Add to add a discipline Select development_discipline and click OK 10 Click the Preview tab to view the newly created task and then save your work by closing the task editor 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 53 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 11 Create another task using the following information Name my_prototype_user_interface Presentation name My Prototype User Interface Brief Description To prototype the system s user interface in an attempt to validate the user interface design against the functional and usability requirements Steps Design the user interface prototype Steps Implement the user interface prototype Roles Primary Performer my_user_interface_designer Work Products Mandatory Input my_navmap Work Products Outputs my user_interface_prototype Categories Discipline development_discipline 12 Click the Preview tab to view the newly created task gt my_prototype_user_interface 3 Task My Prototype User Interface
168. content 165 Process Packages provide visual groupings of processes 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 197 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer of method plug ins content packages and other processes from the method library that will be referred to by the process at some point 5 Click OK The process is created and the process editor is opened 6 In the process editor under the Description tab document your process using the available text fields Note You can use the Rich Text Editor to edit or enter the text for any field that has the rich text editor icon l Click the icon to access the rich text editor Click the icon again to close the editor 7 Decide on your primary process authoring view You develop a process using any of three different views Work Breakdown Structure Define a work breakdown structure in your process Create iterations and activities first and populate your activities by applying tasks from your method content For more information about defining a work breakdown structure see Develop Work Breakdown 167 Structures Team Allocation Define which teams and roles will participate in activities and find responsible work products and tasks from there For more information about teams and r
169. content and processes that you do not own and cannot directly modify When these content packages are upgraded you can import them and then reapply the customisation that you made earlier in a single step without going through each element Variability generally affects two characteristics of a method element its attributes and its relationships with other content elements There are therefore three factors to be considered when using variability Attributes Element data types such as Main Description Incoming Associations Associations from other elements The associated element may have one or more references to the subject element Outgoing Associations Associations to other elements The subject element may have one or more references to the associated element For a complete list of supported associations for each type of element see Associations Impacted by Variability Variability Type Variability type describes how one element affects another through variability associations The five types of variability associations are Not Applicable The element is a base element and does not affect another element through variability This is the default value of an element s variability type Contributes A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute with their properties to their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an addit
170. contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 125 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 169 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 4 3 Replaces Variability The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties A replacing element replaces relevant attributes in the base element when the configuration is published or examined in the Browsing perspective In most cases this is used for method plug ins as a way to replace specific content elements such as roles tasks or activities with a completely new variant Replacement can also be used to change the fundamental relationships of these elements The base content element will be l
171. copied capability pattern elements can be altered deleted or changed without affecting the original method content elements Method elements in a deep copied capability pattern appear in black Iteration phase and activity are three types of activity and a process is a sequence of these activities and the copying capability pattern procedure can be used to deep copy any activity not only capability patterns Deep Copy creates a Not Applicable variability relationship type to the original activity To apply a capability pattern using deep copy 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Delivery Processes or the Capability Pattern folder node and select the process that will be linked to other activities through a variability relationship 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Select your process authoring view by clicking the Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation or the Work Product Usage tab 5 In the Configuration View expand the Processes and Capability Patterns folders node and select a capability pattern or its parts that you want to copy into an activity in a target process Note that you select and drag the parts you want to copy from the Configuration view and not the Library view 6 With the mouse drag the capability pattern or parts into
172. ct is a term that is used to describe task inputs and outputs 6 Guidance provides information about how to perform a role how to create a work product how to perform your task and so on Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customized to specific types of projects Guidance is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most Method and Process elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements 63 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 146 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 64 65 66 10 11 In the Name field type a unique name for your role The role name is the name that is in the Library view In the Presentation name field type a presentati
173. cted above If this option is selected search is supported requiring a Java runtime environment installed on the Web site user s machine because it will use a Java Applet Java EE Web application This option creates one WAR or EAR file in the location selected above that can be installed on a Java EE Web server with Servlet 2 3 capabilities Search will be realised as a Servlet running on such servers 16 Click Finish Publishing is initiated Related topics Method Configurations Overview 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 240 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 10 2 Export to Microsoft Project You can export a capability pattern or delivery process as an XML file that can be opened in Microsoft Project This XML file contains links to specific pages in the original method library Dependencies in the work breakdown structure are carried over to Microsoft Project If there are circular dependencies in work breakdown structure Microsoft Project will issue a warning but will accept the circular dependencies Roles are exported as Microsoft Project resources They are connected to tasks or summary tasks as follows Ifa task is not suppressed the primary and additional performer roles are associated with it If an acti
174. cusceckcesestesss cosseesecsustececaucvbsnctsearn sutesseaunessiebdedsacsvoebsderebenutessenveanss 233 10 PUBLISH AND EXPORTING 238 10 1 Publish Configurations as Web Sites eee eeeseseeeneeeeeceecnaeceaeceaeceseeseeeseeeeeeeees 236 10 2 Export to Microsolt Project cscs tice iciviens beideeaiseteeesstaaeeisesibtesnabeeessnnetresseduaeys celta 241 10 3 Export a Library Configuration 0 0 cece ceesceseceseceseeeseeeseeeeseeesecaecsaeesseeseeesaeeneeees 242 10 4 Import a Library Configuration 0 0 eeeceseceseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaecaeceaeceaeeneeeeaeeneeees 243 10 5 Export a Method Plig tin siensc icca teteesi das ideneisiiteleieteslanieeeasieredelithn eieede 243 10 6 Import a Method PlUg it ee ceseceeeceeeceseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaaecaaecaecaeceseeseeeseeseeeeees 244 LOS 7s EXP Ort MU aes ns scenes E Guiana A E E EE Seteancasivene 244 10 8 Import XM Lesierse onein n pad steeds E EN E E tele 245 11 SHARING CONTENT USING VERSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 247 11 1 Using CVS to Share Libraries and Elements 20 0 0 cece eseesseesseesseceseceseceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 247 11 1 1 Install and Configure CVS 2 0 eee cescesecseecseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeesecesecesecaecsaecsaesaeeeseseaeeeeeeeenes 247 11 1 2 Create a New View with CVS ccccccccccccccccecssensseescensseesorbsteosscnssenssenssavecessesssersetenssensvenneed 248 11 1 3 Add New Libraries tO CVS ircre npepe a oeiee oeri e aree O Eai Uo a EE ee 249 11 1 4 Add a Method Plug In to CVS c
175. d content should be presented and read Related topics Authoring Perspective Configuration View Method Content Categories 153 Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customized to specific types of projects 154 A method content package is a container for method elements Elements are organized in method packages to structure a large scale of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse 155 Method content and process elements are organized into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of categories standard and custom 156 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 157 Method content and process elements are organised into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of category standard and custom 8 Mar
176. d processes that will be included in this configuration Re calculate errors whenever configuration is changed Configuration problem view options C Hide errors O Re calculate errors only when Refresh button is clicked and when saving C Hide warnings Hide infos Content Add these Categories a amp core amp practice 7 amp process C amp publish E my_plug in v Description Plug in and Package Selection Views 2 Problems Te T m 1 error 8 warnings 3 infos Description lt Resource Path Location 3 E Errors 1 item Task imy_design_user_interface my_pl my_design_ EPF_Practices configurations my_design_user_interface my_plug in my_content_p EE Warnings 8 items Artifact imy_contributing_test_case m my_contrib EPF_Practices configurations my_contributing_test_case my_plug in contribution_test amp artifactimy_extends_design my_plug i my_extend EPF_Practices configurations my_extends_design my_plug infextends_test Role my_contributing_architect my_pl my_contrib EPF_Practices confiqurations my_contributing_architect my_plug in contribution_test amp Role my_extend_replace_tester my_p my_extend EPF_Practices confiqurations my_extend_replace_tester my_plug in extend_replac Role my_extends_developer my_plug my_extend EPF_Practices configurations my_extends_developer my_plug in extends_test Role my_replace_tester my_plu
177. descriptors role task and work product in addition to the names and brief descriptions for each of them However the brief description and presentation name for the process itself is kept in the plugin xmi content xmi There is one content xmi file for each process capability pattern or delivery process This file contains the descriptive text for the descriptors of the process elements with the exception of the names presentation names and brief descriptions configuration xmi There is one configuration xmi file for each configuration Files of this type reside in the configurations folder They specify what is included in each configuration including which content packages which process packages and which processes capability patterns and delivery processes are included as well as the specification of what is included in each view a This is a temporary file located at the same level as ibrary xmi It lock should not be placed under version control ee This is a temporary file located at the same level as library xmi It eee should not be placed under version control 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 255 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer File Usage There is
178. dow to view the page describing that role and its relationships to other method elements Use the other tabs to see the information presented when authoring the method content and relationships for a role 4 1 6 Search The goal of this exercise is to use the search function to locate method content To search content 1 Switch to the Authoring perspective if it is not already selected 2 Begin the search by doing either of the following Click the Search icon a in the toolbar Click the Search menu in the main tool bar and select Search 3 Click the Method Search tab Enter architecture in the text box and click Search 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 43 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer S Search AF Method Search SP File Search PIP Java Search Text any string any character architecture O Case sensitive n Method element name or presentation name pattern Scope V Method Content Role Task Work Product V Guidance Standard Category Custom Category Process Capability Pattern Delivery Process Customize Search Cancel It will take a few seconds to find all occurrences Results will be displayed in a new panel labelled Se
179. duct Tip Artefacts and Deliverables contain the Notation fields Outcomes do not 9 Under Icon you can select a node icon to appear with the work product in the Library and Configuration views and in the tree browser in a published Web site The node icon must be 16 x 16 pixels You can also select a Shape icon to appear at the top of the published Web page for the work product 10 Complete the other work product specific fields as needed For information about adding variability to your work product see Method Content Variability 11 Click the Guidance tab When you select a guidance element the brief description of the guidance is displayed Use this part of the editor to add and remove guidance for the work product To add guidance a Click Add b Select the guidance element that you want to add and click OK To remove guidance a In the Guidance field select a guidance element b Click Remove 12 Click the Categories tab Open the appropriate Select window by clicking Select or Add next to the category lists Select a single domain or any number of work product kinds or custom categories and click OK You can remove a work product from a category by selecting it and then clicking the appropriate Remove button 8 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for ma
180. duct Rollup Lieven Cia Lier Defined Liagrams Publish All Publish None 722 You can create process diagrams to illustrate the relationships between processes When you publish a method Web site you can choose whether or not to include these diagrams 3 Activity detail diagrams show the tasks to be performed as part of an activity that is associated with a particular role These diagrams also show mandatory input and output work products for each task Activity detail diagrams are suitable for activities that consist of only child tasks You can create activity detail diagrams by using the Diagram editor and you can include diagrams that are created by other applications 724 You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 233 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 A window opens listing each diagram that you created for this activity element Clear the diagrams that you do not want to be published 7 If there are multiple diagrams in the process than you can select to have all diagrams in the process published by selecting Publish All or have none of them published by selecting Pu
181. e top title Text Used in text editors 71 You can use the Publish Method Configuration wizard to generate a Web site based on a method configuration 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 266 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Font Description Dialog Used in dialog boxes To set these fonts click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Appearance gt Colours and Fonts Several other secondary font settings are also available on the Colours and Fonts preference page 12 2 4 Accessibility The appearance of the caret used in the text editor can be changed by setting preferences on the Accessibility preferences panel To set the accessibility preferences Select Windows gt Preferences Expand the tree node for General gt Editors gt Text Editors and select Accessibility Set the following preferences Option Description This option replaces the original caret with a custom caret and Use custom shows a different caret for Overwrite and Insert mode garei Default is on This option replaces the original caret with a more visible Enable thick thicker caret caret a Default is on Use characters Quick Diff shows the changes in a vertical ruler using colours to
182. e CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled These steps apply to elements such as roles tasks work products guidance categories configurations capability patterns and delivery processes To delete method and process elements under CVS 1 Open the Authoring perspective B Authoring 2 Use the tree browser to choose the element that you want to delete 253 You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel 54 You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined 55 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 56 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 251 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 3 Right click the element and click Delete 4 Inthe Send an Edit Notification to CVS window clic
183. e Mirror Become a Friend Friendd ogin Donate 35 or more and Become a Friend of Eclipse PayPal Please choose a mirror close to you Europe a France lalto ftp 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 8 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer This time you should click on the green arrow not on Download You are then asked to save the file ep composer 1 5 0 4 win32 zip 7 2 Installation Once the download has finished you have to extract the zip file The result is a folder with the name epfcomposer and you can either extract it directly to a destination folder or move it to a destination folder after extraction The folder can be put under c program files eclipse c epfcomposer or any other destination folder you fancy Then go to the destination folder in our example the epfcomposer in the root directory of the D partition and start the EPF composer programme by double clicking on the epf exe file for future use it is recommended to create a short cut on the desktop The Eclipse Process Framework Composer Welcome screen appears Figure 5 EPF Welcome Screen GEPF Composer Jo E File Edit Se Co 0 Fe Welcome x a ti E l Eclipse Process Framework Composer
184. e a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 184 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 185 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 203 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Remember For the purposes of this topic the breakdown element example used is Activity Other breakdown elements include but are not limited to phase and iteration The element that you use depends on the scope of the process that you create 2 Right click the element either a Capability Pattern or Delivery Process to which you want to add st
185. e and manage This separates your content from already existing content created and controlled by others and allows you to update the library with their new library releases without affecting the content that you have created in your own plug ins All method Content Packages are stored under the Content Packages heading Library 3 gt OOOO y n Method Content gt a Content Packages mA First Content Package lt 5 Roles i Tasks amp Work Products Guidance BA Second Content Package lt 3 Roles Tasks 8 Work Products G Guidance amp Standard Categories Custom Categories 4 Processes Ga Configurations Each method Content Package has the following schema structure of virtual folders sectors or nodes Roles Tasks Work Products Guidance Remember You cannot create a new content package or any other element in a locked method plug in To create a method content package 1 Find your method plug in in the Library View 2 Navigate into the plug in to find Content Packages This folder contains all content packages with method elements 3 Right click the content package and click New gt Content Package 4 The Content Package editor pops up The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organised into sets of method plug ins and configurations 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All
186. e controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customized to specific types of projects 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 153 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Create Method Content Create a Task Create a Role Create a Work Product Create Guidance 7 2 Create Guidance Elements 7 2 1 Common Guidance is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most method and process elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements Guidance elements can be attached to method content elements Work products tasks and roles and pro
187. e implications for making changes to these files in a version controlled environment Table 10 Function of files impacted by version control systems File Usage The file ibrary xmi contains a reference to every plug in in your method library When you create new packages or processes EPF Composer does not modify this file This file is modified only when a plug in is library xmi created This file is shared by all plug ins in your method library so you need to be especially careful to coordinate changes being made by different individuals 63 You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel 64 You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined 65 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 66 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 254 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution E
188. e plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 166 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 4 1 Contributes Variability A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element Relevant information in the contributing element is added to the base element Text fields in the contributing element are appended at the end of the respective text fields in the base element For example text in a brief description is appended to the brief description in the base A contributing element only adds attributes and associations to the base element It never overrides or replaces existing attr
189. e replacing element Exceptions All extending associations are many to many except for the following association m Work Products can only be assigned to a single Domain element No additions are made from the base when a Domain is extended There are no exceptions when extending a Work Product A complete list of supported associations for each type of element is provided on the Associations Impacted by Variability page Add and extend association 1 To make an element extend another element on the Description page use the Content Variability section 2 Select Extends as the Variability type and then select the base element that this element extends Note that the base element must be the same type of element as the extending element Related topics Method Content Variability Associations Impacted by Variability Browsing Variability Relationships Contributes Variability Replaces Variability Extends and Replaces Variability 122 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 123 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements 124 contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to
190. e types of variability associations are Variability one ee A iation Description Type ssociatio escriptio Not The element is a base element and does not affect another element through Applicable variability This is the default value of an element s variability type A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute with their properties to their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties The base appears in the published Web site but the contributing element does not In and out relationships from the contributing element are added to the Contributes base Text from the contributing element is appended to corresponding base sections a When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element A replacing element replaces parts of the base element It provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly Replaces changing any of the base element s existing properties The replacer appears in the published Web site but the base element does not Out Relationships in the replacer are left untouched and those of the base 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 165 of 275 This p
191. e updates to a diagram of the base element Right click in the open diagram of the extending element and select Refresh from Base Activity Related topics Process Authoring Overview Method Configurations Overview Create Capability Patterns Create Delivery Processes Working with Process Diagrams 217 Working with Activity Detail Diagrams Working with Work Product Dependency Diagrams Publish Diagrams 216 9 10 2 Working with Activity Detail Diagrams The activity detail diagrams show the tasks within an activity arranged by the responsible role that performs them and the mandatory input and output work products for each task The automatically generated diagrams show all the tasks associated with a particular role with their mandatory inputs and outputs You can also create or modify activity detail diagrams by using the diagram editor and the palette tools You can also include diagrams created by other applications To create activity detail diagrams 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 16 You can create process diagrams to illustrate the relationships between processes When you publish a method Web site you can choose whether or not to include these diagrams 217 Activity detail diagrams show the tasks to be performed as part of an activity that is associated with a particular role These diagrams also show mandatory input and output work products for each task Activity detail di
192. ecision Node A 2 Merge Node E Activity Ta 5 Iteration o i Phase Detail System Wide Requirements amp Milestone C Task Descriptor s i Geometric Shapes O Properties al RE Appearance ae and Cotors Rulers amp Grid a iS Advanced w Li a a 7 There are multiple ways to access to the diagram editing options Draw or modify the activity diagram using the editor Palette You can set different options for the palette by right clicking in the palette area to access a a pop up window with different options There is a button bar on the top for editing You select the objects and click on the edit buttons to change the appearance The activity diagram Properties view contains three tabs Appearance Rulers amp Grid and Advance tabs with options for editing the diagram By letting the mouse hover over the surface of the diagram itself will produce a special fleeting horizontal window which let you select and add different e B types of nodes explained below ee Res amp ch Each node type is By clicking the Geometric Shapes in the palette several shapes can be added to the diagram Geometric Shapes Oval fg Cylinder Rectangle Types Polygon Line 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 222 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 w
193. ective FB and click Browsing ea Browsing j Related topics Authoring Perspective Configuration View User Interface 6 4 Library View The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organised into sets of method plug ins and configurations The Library view is available in the Authoring perspective and it is not accessible in the Browsing perspective It is organised in visual packages that are logically created and sorted based on the plug in punctuation within the names Using dots in the name of the plug ins creates logical packages that are used for presentation in the Flat and Hierarchical view For example if you create and name the following plug ins teamA domainX WP1 teamA domainX WP2 teamA core teamB tools TA teamB tools TB teamB core The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 124 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer
194. ed All elements required to create an activity diagram are available on the palette 5 Right click the diagram workspace and select Add gt Phase to add a new phase called Construction to the diagram The name will initially be New Phase To change the name right click on the node select Show Properties View click on the Advanced tab select the Name and edit the name field 6 Using the Control Flow tool create links between the phases to show the sequence of the phases Click on Control Flow click on the first node keep the mouse button pressed and move the cursor to the second node and release the button You may name the control flow link E gt My DP zs Delivery Process My DP My DP 3 Palette gt gt Select RA A KA S Zoom _ A Note 7 Inception Elaboration Construction gt Flows 2 Control Flow Nodes Activity Partition ae v 7 Switch back to the Work Breakdown Structure view of My DP and notice the new phase Also notice that the links you added on the diagram are reflected in the Predecessors column 8 Close the diagrams that you opened 9 Inthe Work Breakdown Structure right click the Requirements activity and click Diagrams gt Open Activity Detail Diagram The Activity Detail Diagram is automatically generated It shows the following The roles that perform tasks in the activity The tasks that the roles perform The input and output work products for each task
195. ed in a published Web site Explore and preview the content in the Configuration view by expanding the Categories and other folders down to method elements Click a method element to open it in the content view Related topics Authoring Perspective Browsing Perspective Configuration View Method Content Variability User Interface 34 35 36 The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organised into sets of method plug ins and configurations The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 127 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 7 Open an E
196. ed page for the guidance Click the Guidance tab This part of the editor allows you to add and remove guidance for the element To add guidance click Add select the guidance that you want to add and click OK To remove guidance select it in the Guidance field and then click Remove When you select a guidance element the brief description of the guidance is displayed Click the Preview tab to view the newly created guidance and save by closing the tab It is possible to change the types of some of the guidance types to a limited number of other guidance types To change a guidance type in the Description tab under General Information section click Change Type and select an available new type 100 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 101 The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organized into sets of method plug ins and configurations 102 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to p
197. ed with the composer 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 14 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 9 Copy Library Copy Library The library you are opening is a default library supplied with the composer We highly recommend that you make a working copy of this library for editing Enter a location and library name for the new library and click Copy to make a working copy Click Skip to continue editing the default library in the current location The editing capability for the default library is restricted by the access _ permissions enforced by your platforms D epf composer epf_jwork_practices Skip What this message attempts to say is that you have the choice of either using the files in the ept_work_practices folder or creating a separate folder using the operating system s file utility and then letting the epf composer copy the existing files over to the new folder for example epf work_practices In the latter case you will have two sets of files one working set that you can modify and another with the original pristine and unchanged files In the second case you will always have an unchanged reference copy You can for example create a new folder using the operating system s File Explorer
198. editor by using the following key combinations Press Ctrl Tab to navigate between different sections of a process element Pres Ctrl Page Up or Ctrl Page Down to switch between different tabs of a process element Press the Application key to open a menu If your keyboard does not have an Application key refer to information from your operating system vendor on adapting keyboards Press Escape to navigate between different level menus Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to navigate between lines To expand or collapse a tree node press Right or Left Arrows To navigate to the property tab for a process use the Application key and choose the Show Properties View menu In the Properties tab for a process press Tab Up Arrow or Down Arrow to navigate between different sections like General and Documentation Press the space key to check or clear a checkbox in Properties tab 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 262 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Diagram Editor To open a diagram editor of a process press the Application key If your keyboard does not have an Application key refer to information from your operating system vendor on adapting keyboards In the opened diagram press the Application key from which you can add any
199. ee eesecescceseceeceeceeeeeceaeceeneeceaeceeneesaeeseneeceaeeeeeneeeaeeeeneees 250 11 1 5 Add Elements to CVS wisvcisccistiscicsssesncbiessstavdusonislassebauiivecssnesseeuiveoveessdhescescuevbecomuasesiaveavest 250 11 1 6 Delete Elements under CVS 000 ese eseseeeseesneeconesoevecerensesnsesseessesssesserscessserseesoesenesenseess 251 11 1 7 Edit Elements Under CV S eisi cieciescuccescenesckavsanssecvbewecadictyecacvecnvensvereecasveensonsvebhecesmbepsensveateess 252 11 1 8 Move elements under CVS i scccsctcescsssnssennsensvlascessstesonssutesseuavensseuavaescevsesstersctsensensventoots 253 11 2 Version Control Reference renpercoroniireiiierisi eirese asne e a STEES isaer Et 254 11 2 1 Version Control for Specific Files 00 eee cece cseecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseesecsaecsaeseeeneeeneeees 254 11 2 2 Common Actions Impact on Specific Files eee cece eee eeseeeeeeeeeesecesecsaecaeseeeneeeaeeees 256 11 3 Using Rational ClearCase cscrscs tices teivieds cheadteascahrees scabs ninn aiea 260 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 5 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 12 APPENDIX 2 12 1 Keyboard Shortcuts 3 ccsieierstihisciaaleivetsieatdasetigoneiecedenestetvessianctevpedievesleligenaaceivesale 261 12 2 Preferentes vs tices brs saccch
200. eeeeeeaeeeaeecaaecaaecsaeceaeesseeseesseeseeeeees 142 6 13 Search for COMLEME vs cssccessseecaceesung The cuciecesusssdes souctsdussungtebenscunsesnaetensansecdusansaessteuresed 143 7 CREATE METHOD CONTENT 145 7 1 Create Method Content Elements 000 0 ee ee eeceeseeeseeceecseecnaecaeceaeesseeeseeseeesseeseneeees 145 Telok Createra ROG acchoiec catenins E E Sa cho bie 146 T2 Created Task oreinen ionerne E ER RE EE EEr EE NETE paedaveevous iedaadsdgessbovuonsanseusventoel 148 Tel Createa Work Product esiis orrir eie aroro errora ORE EEEE EEE LEESE NETE 151 T2 Create Guidance Elementsin seiiet a E aE 154 T2 COMMON remirar nane E E E E E AE E E T EE E RET 154 Tezy Practices ronronner E N a E E a datsevenseens 158 Dedede Glossary Ente S ccsis ccs evcsntoses sess seeSebeenseed E E A EEA E TE 160 T24 Guidance Relationships visciccecissessccssscvecisecussvsseuveesssusescvsceuuresccodngevososnssesdessstensess dasgcnserseus 161 PS Rich Text Eqttoteccscniicitora ication vine iedvadsilissuadias cipan i i A 162 7 3 1 Add References or Hyperlinks 0 eee ee cesecesecseecseecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeesseeeaeenseesaecaecseesaaseneeees 164 TA Method Content Variability v icsi cc ccccdvasscteiee tee tascstiberedeydiianeesnateleaieanaeehe 165 TAAl Contributes Varta bility ccs csccauesshseasdesnccsceisnasentvonsettecsnsnanserectessrcascandssuseavespvsensGeeudeasesabsenns 167 TAD Extends Variability iiss secs senene i E EE R E E E EE 168 TAS Replaces Va
201. ees 205 9 02 Activity VarlabDiltty iiss catienisiseee aks EE EE A eaaiaisiasisin 206 9 7 Capability Patterns REUSE iiinis inii a elena 209 9 7 1 Copy Capability Patterns vemod e a ear E E RE EE E R E 209 9 7 2 Deep Copy Capability Patterns sssi eee cece csc cseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeesaecsaessaesaeesaeeeaeeees 211 9 7 3 Extend Capability Patterns css cssccstscci a enore eere ranore io AE EE ahicedvasvisees avacigncseesders 212 973s Local Comtributionicssiscsisis sccseassversesscrshseatavcsbes wesadeosseouiaierebecasessebioasvel raa ENSE E EVERE aTa 214 O Taa Local Replacement ssi ciajcaxcsies niine e E E A 214 9 7 3 3 Local Replacement and Deep COPY isiscesccsiscsatecsissscsesscseiscactaaveerssesdossscaatesdsersavessvacscenseosssesaeees 215 9 8 Process Element Properties View 00 ceeceecceseesseeeseeeseecseecsaeceseceaecsseesseeeseeseeeeeeeeees 216 9 9 Apply Process to Method Synchronisation cece eeeeeseesseceeceseceseeeseeeeeesseeseneeees 218 9 10 Working with Process Diagrams 0 cesceeseeeseeeseeesceeseecsaecaecaecaecsseesseeeeeeseeeeeneeees 219 9 10 1 Working with Activity Diagrams eee cece ese cseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesecaecsaessaeeaeesaeeeaeeees 220 9 10 2 Working with Activity Detail Diagrams 20 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaecaecaesaeeeaeeeaeeees 226 9 10 3 Working with Work Product Dependency Diagrams e ee eeeesecese cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 229 9 10 4 Publish Dia Sram 2c vsccccc
202. eference the category then the category is removed without confirmation 2 Optional To change assignments by using the method element editor a Open the custom category element to which you want to assign new children to in the Method element editor and select the Assign tab b Click Assign The Select window is displayed c From the tree view select the method element that you want to assign to the custom category and click OK d Click Unassign to remove elements from the category e To save your changes click File gt Save or close the editor and click Yes when prompted to save the changes Related topics Custom Categories Method Content Categories 8 3 4 Deep Copy Custom Categories Deep copy is the mechanism that you can use to copy a custom category with all its children and assignments It is used to clone a hierarchy of custom categories To deep copy a custom category 1 In the Library View of the Authoring Perspective right click the custom category that you want to clone and select Deep Copy The Deep copy dialog is displayed 2 From the tree view select a destination for the selected elements and click OK The custom category all of its children and its assignment are copied and now displayed in the Library view Related topics Custom Categories Method Content Categories 8 4 Assign Categories to Content Elements Standard and custom categories are assigned to method content
203. ei E A EE R RES 119 5 10 8 Process Content Summary iecere ne E E E R RRE E EREA 120 6 GETTING STARTED WITH METHOD AUTHORING 122 6 1 User Interface cs crroiennioieser enai irae Ea E aia Ee E A AR TE a a ei eSa 122 6 2 Authoring Perspective eoria e n E E EE EEEE 123 6 3 Browsing Perspective oers ienei eeie aedini da ineeie e ie REEE Ee EOE ne a 124 6 4 TD tary VC We sestscsie cect se Aeteeee nats ilece veers then eee tiasinden EA AEE A talento 124 6 5 Conf puration VieW ss c tvacsancn nine nee n aE aE E EEE EE EEE 126 6 6 View Method Content ssssssiisss asoni eerse rn eenen e eiei e ienee as EE ENE EERE t 126 6 7 Open an Existing Method Library esseseseeeeseereesieessserriesrrsirsresresteeresrissesrrssresreseese 128 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 3 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 8 Create a New Method Library 0 eee eeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeecaaecaaecaeceseceseeeeeseeesseeeees 129 6 9 Create a Method Plg Anienem anaia nai iat 130 6 10 Create a Method Content Package srs iisiesirsortorsirsesissirrneiriceressssirrenssiiressisiisressr sssse 136 6 11 Create a Method Configuration 0 eee eeceseeseceeeeeeseeeseeeaeecsaecaecsseesseeseeseeeseeeeees 139 6 12 Copy a Method Configuration 0 cece ceeceeceeecesee
204. eir base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 122 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 130 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 131 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 171 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this d
205. elate to each other over time Supporting Material Used as a category for other types of guidance that are not specifically defined elsewhere It can be related to all kinds of content elements including other guidance elements Template Provides for a work product a predefined table of contents sections packages headings a standardised format in addition to descriptions about how the sections and packages are supposed to be used and completed Templates cannot only be provided for documents but also for conceptual models or physical data stores Term Definition Terms define concepts used to enhance the Glossary A term definition is not directly related to content elements but its relationship is being derived when the term is used in the content elements description text a Shows how to use a specific tool to accomplish some piece of work Tool Mentor in the context of or independently from a task or activity White Paper A concept guidance that has been externally reviewed or published P and can be read and understood in isolation of other content elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 156 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Term Description and guidance To c
206. elements You can assign categories either from the category point of view or from the method content 163 The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organized into sets of method plug ins and configurations 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 191 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer point of view In other words you can edit the category and add the relevant content elements or you can edit the method content elements and add the relevant categories Related topics Method Content Categories Custom Categories Assign Category Modify Category Assignment Category Variability 8 4 1 Assign Category To assign a custom category 3 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 4 Expand the folder node in the Library view panel for relevant method plug in and expand the Method Content and Custom Categories folder 5 Double click the custom category that you want to assign to method content elements or right click the same category and select Edit The custom category editor opens 6 Click the Assign tab and click the Assign button The Select Dialog Most common window opens 7 If you have previously created content add your Roles Artefacts Tasks and
207. ement system in which you would store and access documents all in their own shapes and formats All content managed in EPF Composer can be published as a Web site with method guidance and processes that can be deployed to Web servers for distributed usage by multiple teams The content can include externally and internally developed content such as whitepapers guidelines templates principles best practices internal procedures and regulations training material and any other general descriptions of the methods Second to provide process engineering capabilities by supporting architects process engineers programme and project managers in selecting tailoring and rapidly assembling processes for their concrete projects EPF Composer provides catalogues of pre defined processes for typical project situations that can be adapted to individual needs It also provides process building blocks called capability patterns that represent best development practices for specific disciplines technologies or management styles These building blocks form a toolkit for quick assembly of processes based on project specific needs EPF Composer also allows you to set up your own organisation specific capability pattern libraries Finally the processes created with EPF Composer can be published and deployed as Web sites EPF Composer provides key capabilities Creating processes with breakdown structure editors and workflow diagrams through use
208. en the subject area is very complex The method plug ins that you create will mimic the reference model and the decomposition you have chosen The hierarchical decomposition must be reflected in the naming of the method plug ins the dots in the name of the plug ins reproduce the logical groupings of the hierarchical reference model The hierarchical view available in the Library view will display the hierarchical decomposition The Library view shows all method content in the current library If for example the names the following plug ins are as follows teamA domainX WP1 teamA domainX WP2 teamA core teamB tools TA teamB tools TB teamB core In this case the Library view will display the plug ins in the hierarchical presentation as shown here mayan 7 5 teamA H domainx a8 WPI a t WP2 core teamB amp 8 tools eo TA gt TB core 3 Configurations my_new_config H N eat Ia In the Hierarchical presentation in the Library view highest level library content unit is called a logical package with the icon The logical packages are groupings of method plug ins and represent different levels in the hierarchical reference model of the A reference model is an abstract representation of the entities and relationships involved in a complex domain and form the conceptual basis for the development of more concrete models and ultimately implementations 8 Ma
209. en you author your the process you therefore need to create and or assign a configuration that defines the set of elements and relationships that must be made visible to the process This process authoring configuration is referred to as the default configuration for the process and it should define the set of method plug ins content packages and other processes from the method library that will be referred to by the process The method configuration editor is used to select which method plug ins content packages and categories of elements will be included or excluded from the method library into the method configuration The selections restrict the scope of the content used as a basis for defining your process These selections also determine the content of the published Web site 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 117 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The processes can be included in a configuration to be published as part of the published Web site and can be exported to Microsoft Project A default configuration needs to be selected for the creation of a capability pattern or a delivery process mii 3 fad e lt gt pl_oy_new_plug_in i at Method Content New Process Component gg tg Content Packages 7 I e OS Slanderd Ca
210. ends and replaces relationship is transitive and evaluated top down relative to the direction of the replacement If a replacing element is also replaced the final replacing element prevails Contributes variability relationships are resolved before replaces and extends and replaces relationships Extends relationships are resolved last Variability is always resolved top down from the base to the variability elements Within the same level contributes relationships are resolved first Replaces or extends and replaces are resolved afterwards How to add an extends and replaces association 1 Use the Content Variability section on the Description tab to make an element extend and replace another element 2 Select Extends and Replaces as the Variability type and select the base element that this element will replace The base element must be the same type of element as the replacing element Related topics Method Content Variability Associations Impacted by Variability Browsing Variability Relationships Extends Variability 132 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 133 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements 8 Mar 1
211. ent Variability Associations Impacted by Variability Contributes Variability Extends Variability Replaces Variability Extends and Replaces Variability 143 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 145 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 146 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing
212. ent without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 121 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 168 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Incoming associations from the base element are not inherited by the extending element Attribute values of the base element are inherited by the extending element if the extending element has not defined its own values Extends relationships are transitive If an extending element has its own extending associations the second extension inherits attributes from its direct and indirect base elements Contribution associations are resolved before Extends associations Contribution is evaluated first and then extending elements inherit afterwards from the base element including all of its contributions Replace precedes Extends If a base element has both replace and extends relationships the extending element inherits from th
213. enu to select Extends then click Select The Select Dialog Artefact window opens Choose the work product design as the base and click OK Close the editor window to save your changes Switch to the Browsing perspective In the Configuration view select the Extends Design work product in the Uncategorised folder under Domains You will see in the page preview that content entered in the extending artefact has replaced the content in the base artefact whereas content not provided has been inherited from the base artefact File Edit Search Configuration Window Help jm gt X my basic configuration iv A OP SH E 87 Browsing 8 configuration 3 a amp Y A content my basic configuration eos B7H ES E Disciplines A Artifact Extends Design S F Domains Architecture Extends Design Brief Description H E Development E Project Management Extends Design ce Requirements ES Test Expand All Sections H Collapse All Sections E Project Definition and Scop E Project Risk Describe the elements of the system so they can be examined S E Project Status and understood in ways not possible by reading the source H E Project Work code B Software Design Back to top Software Implementation H E Technical Specification E Technical Test Results Fulfilled e Software Design GE Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets fa Tasks Input To
214. er C Documents and Se gm Edit Search Configuration Window Help Open lt Method Plug in dose Cirl W 8 Method Configuration Close All Ctrl Shift wW F Other LJ P n Cals teal Main description Save all Ctrl Shift s Norma _ Aiai Reve e The EPF tool has specific co a automatically generates cong g e The EPF tool has a supporti context EPF supports grou Bi E e The EPF tool has a plug in a T of document templates withi t Export Acknowledgements Exit The EPF version of TOGAF 9 was metamodel to support TOGAF Again you will create a working directory for the method in our case we created a folder called epf_work_TOGAF9 Then open EPF and create a new Method Library 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 17 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 12 Create new Library Folder and point to the path New Method Library m lok Create a new method library Specify a path and description for the new method library Path D epf composer epf_work_TOGAF9 Description Click Finish and the Method Library is then created You can now import the TOGAF9 Method Plug in to this library Figure 13 Import Method Plug in Eclipse Process
215. er provides three types of process diagrams Activity Diagrams show subordinate activities as part of a higher level activity They also show the sequence relationships between those activities Activity Detail Diagrams show tasks in an activity with their performing roles along with input and output work products Activity detail diagrams are similar to workflow detail diagrams Work Product Dependency Diagrams illustrate work product dependencies on other work products All three types of diagrams are generated and synchronised with the associated work breakdown structure Changes to the process structure using the diagram editor will be automatically reflected in the work breakdown structure 5 10 7 Descriptors Processes do not directly include core method elements but create local references termed descriptors that refer back to the elements in the method library Descriptors contain additional information relevant to the specific context of the process where they are inserted and a link to the core method element on which they is based Roles tasks and work products are all included in processes as descriptors and they can be customised to fit within the context of the process in which they are used Each element can be represented by multiple descriptors in a process Descriptors enable reuse of method elements in multiple different contexts For example each time a task is included in a process a reference object to that task
216. er the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer my_content_package 83 E Content Package my_content_package M General Information Provide general information about this content package Name my_content_package Presentation name My Content Package Brief description My content package description lt gt Description Important You cannot create a new content package or any other element in a locked plug in 4 Save your new content package There are four ways to save a package or an element m Close the editor and confirm you want to save m Click the disk icon in the toolbar Use the shortcut ctrl s m Click File gt Save Remember When you create a new element or modify an existing element a symbol is displayed in the tab next to the name of the element indicating that the element needs to be saved Tip EPF Composer automatically creates nodes for Tasks Roles Work Products and Guidance under the new content package 4 2 4 Create a Work Product The goal of this exercise is to create a new work product In this exercise you will create a type of work product called an artefact You can create any content but some examples are provided if you want to use them These examples are referred to in other tutorials In all cases new method elements are created by right clicking on the destination folder for the new ele
217. er to a copy of an existing configuration Before your new elements can be seen in the configuration view you need to add your new method plug in to a configuration We will add the new method plug in to a copy of the publish openup configuration and see the results in the Configuration view To add a plug in to a configuration 1 Use the Open Perspective button Eto switch to the Browsing perspective 2 Try to find your new content in the configuration view panel For example look for My Design role set You should not see it 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 62 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 3 Switch to the Authoring perspective and then expand the Configurations node in the Library view panel 4 Make acopy of the publish openup configuration by right clicking the configuration and selecting Copy Right click the Configurations folder and click Paste Name the new configuration my basic configuration 5 Double click my basic configuration to open the configuration 6 Click the Plug in and Package Selection tab 7 Add my_plug in to the configuration by checking the box next to it in the Content section 2 my basic configuration 53 To Configuration my basic configuration M Configuration Content
218. er to include these diagrams EPF Composer provides three types of process diagrams Activity diagrams These diagrams show the subordinate activities in a higher level activity They also show the sequence relationships between those activities Activity detail diagrams These diagrams show tasks in an activity with their performing roles along with input and output work products Activity detail diagrams are similar to workflow detail diagrams 212 A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 219 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Work product dependency diagrams These diagrams illustrate work product dependencies on other work products All three types of diagrams are generated and synchronised with the associated work breakdown structure Changes to the process structure using the diagram editor will be automatically reflected in the work breakdown structure Related t
219. erations Estimating considerations are a specific type of guidance which provide sizing measures or standards for sizing the work effort associated with performing a particular piece of work and instructions for their successful use Estimating guideline An estimating guideline is a specific type of guidance that provides sizing measures or standards for sizing the work effort associated with performing a particular piece of work and instructions for their successful use It may be comprised of estimation considerations and estimation metrics Example An example is a specific type of guidance that describes a representative instance of a completed work product Guideline A guideline is a specific type of guidance that provides additional information on how to perform a particular task or set of related tasks Guidelines may provide additional details rules and recommendations on work products and their properties They can describe best practices and different approaches for doing work Iteration An iteration is a group of activities that are repeated more than once Iterations are used to organise work into repetitive cycles Library view The library view shows all method plug ins and configurations in a method library The library view is available only in the authoring perspective 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 271 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made availab
220. erns as building blocks to assemble a delivery process or larger capability patterns and customise the pattern s content to the particular situation to which it is applied This ensures optimal reuse and application of the key practices they express With capability patterns you can decompose complex set activities into patterns with the added benefit of improved complexity management Change is more localised consistency is improved and productivity is increased The following chapters describe how processes either delivery processes or capability patterns can achieve reuse either through copying or extending already existing capability patterns or parts of patterns Related topics Process Management Method Content Variability Category Variability Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Extend Capability Patterns Local Contribution Local Replacement Local Replacement and Deep Copy 9 7 1 Copy Capability Patterns When an activity or Capability Pattern is copied into a target process or activity its method content elements are disconnected from the original capability pattern The copied capability pattern elements can be altered deleted or changed as you want in the process editor without affecting the original method content elements Method elements in a copied capability pattern appear in black Iteration
221. eters of this page define the layout of the Role Diagram that is published with a role page Supporting method plug ins are method plug ins which content will only be published if it is referenced by another method plug in Method gt Publishing Browsing gt Supporting Plug in Include descriptor relationships to linked elements in supporting plug ins off by default This option defines an exception of this rule for relationship from a descriptor to a method content element The default is to not publish such elements 12 2 2 Alternate Help Browser This procedure describes how to use a speech enabled browser to read the online help Pages in the Help system are normally displayed through an internal browser included with the application This internal browser can be deselected which causes the default system browser to be used to display Help pages To set alternate help browser 1 Select Windows gt Preferences 2 Click Help 3 Select Use External Browser 12 2 3 Fonts The following table lists the four main fonts that the Eclipse workbench uses Table 13 Fonts used Font Description Used in Plug in Development Environment PDE editors on welcome pages Banner and in the title area of many wizards For example the New Project wizard uses this font in the top title Used as a section heading Header For example the welcome page for the Eclipse platform uses this font for th
222. ethod Content gt Content Packages c Clear all selected content packages d Check extend_and_replace_test This should be the only content package selected in my_plug in This is done so that there are no conflicting extensions in the same method element e Close the configuration editor panel to save your changes 9 Now switch to the Browsing perspective 10 Open Role Sets gt Basic Roles In the Configuration view you will see that there is no tester role in the Basic Roles folder It was replaced by the My Extend and Replace Tester role Also notice that other content elements in the base plug in that referenced the tester role now reference the extend and replacing role instead If you open the Disciplines folder and view the task Implement Test you will see that the Primary Performer is now My Extend and Replace Tester Extends and Replaces works in a similar way for tasks artefacts guidance and categories 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 78 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer File Edit Search Configuration Window Help 1 ml gt my basic configuration 8 Browsing E CADRE E eaea Configuration 83 A my basic configuration E E Disciplines 2 Ar
223. ew Process Component Specify name and default configuration for the delivery process to be created Name My DP Default Configuration my basic configuration w 4 Click the Work Breakdown Structure tab 5 To create an inception phase in the work breakdown structure view right click My DP then select New Child gt Phase Call the phase Inception 6 We will create a Requirements Management activity under Inception In the work breakdown structure view right click Inception and click New gt Child gt Activity Name the new activity Requirements BS My DP 3 Ta Presentation Name Index P M Type Planned Re K my DP 0 Delivery Pro Inception 1 Phase Requirements 2 Activity lt gt Description Work Breakdown Str Team Allocation Work Product Usage Consolidated View 7 Now we are going to add some tasks to the Requirements activity In the Configuration view open Disciplines gt Requirements Drag and drop the following tasks onto the requirements activity that you just created Develop Technical Vision Identify and Outline Requirements Detail System Wide Requirements When you include these tasks in your process the associated roles and work products are also included in the process 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 83 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public Lice
224. ew is a custom category that is designed for publication You can categorise content according to any scheme using custom categories Required content packages and content elements are assigned to a custom category The custom category can then be added as a view to a method configuration showing the required content packages and content elements assigned to that custom category Custom categories can also be displayed with the elements that they are categorising For example you could create a custom category that logically organises content that is related to your development organisation department such as a testing category that groups together all roles work products tasks and guidance elements related to testing You can organise custom categories in a hierarchy which means that you can create a category as a child of another category Child categories can be referenced by more than one parent category In the hierarchy you are building nested custom categories using operations such as Assign or Reassign to influence the structure of that hierarchy You can copy a custom category with all its children and assignments Deep copy is the mechanism used to clone a hierarchy of custom categories Custom categories can contain any type of element and can be used to organise content according to any scheme You can then use custom categories to compose publishable navigation views which provide a means to organise define the way metho
225. ew the task Implement Test you will see that the Primary Performer is now My Replace Tester Replace works in a similar way for tasks artefacts guidance and categories File Edit Search Configuration Window Help ie my basic configuration x 0 FY EF Browsing 82 Configuration 53 gt E BA Content CA gS my basic configuration E E Disciplines Ead E Architecture Bl Development E Openur Disciplines Test Scripts into suites and collaborate to ensure appropriate depth H Project Management and breadth of test feedback Requirements 3 E Test Disciplines Test D Create Test Cases Implement Test Scripts to validate a Build of the solution Organize Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections Run Tests Uncategorized Tasks 2 Domains To implement step by step Test Scripts that demonstrate the solution satisfies the GE Work Product Kinds requirements CS Role Sets 5 amp Basic Roles analyst a Any Role Architect Roles Primary Performer Additional Performers Developer e My Replace Tester e Analyst Project Manager toll amp Stakeholder amp My Replace Tester biarided Optional My Design A Tes i amp my on e Test Case e Test Script cB Uncategorized Roles e Software L4 Tools Implementation Back to top 4 3 9 Extend and Replace a Role The goal of this exercise is
226. exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 123 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Browsing Perspective 6 3 Browsing Perspective You can use the Browsing perspective to preview and navigate through a method configuration without making any changes Error Bookmark not a halla The browsing perspective contains the Configuration View which shows the content in the currently selected configuration Click any element in the Configuration panel to preview the element in the content view as it will appear in a published Web site The content view provides browser like navigation features Click any link in the displayed page to go to that page Use the buttons in the content view toolbar to perform familiar browser actions such as back or refresh Selecting the Browsing Perspective Click Open Persp
227. f which they are composed In addition activities also contain role descriptors work product descriptors and milestones 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 154 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer There are fourteen types of guidance elements Bilibrary 8 P pi_my_new_plug_in BA Method Content gt sa Content Packages BA Cp_my_new_content CS Roles Tasks 8 Work Products ase New F amp Checklist Irs mA Secon New Method Plug in ma ore amp Standard 8 Guideline 42 Discip _ 5x R Domai amp P Estimation Considerations Work bikai ES Role S g El Report A Tools Reusable Asset Custom Roadmap 0 Processes Refresh p Supporting Material 2 Capabili Template a Delivery Processes Term Definition amp Configurations Tool Mentor i Whitepaper The fourteen guidance element types are Checklist Concept Example Guideline Estimation Consideration Practice Report Reusable Asset Roadmap Supporting Material Template Term Definition Tool Mentor and White Paper Types of guidance elements Table 4 Guidance Element Types Term Description Identifies a series of items that need to be completed or verified Checklist Checklists are often used in revie
228. field Click the Roles tab and in the Primary performers field click Add The Select Dialog Roles window opens From this list select my_user_interface_designer as the Primary Performer The complete list of roles is long but you can shorten it by entering my in the Name patterns field Click OK 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 52 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Select Dialog Roles Method Element Type Roles Name patterns matching names will be shown my Patterns are separated by comma where any string any character My Plug in BA my Brief Description The User Interface Designer coordinates the design of the user interface User Interface Designers are also involved in gathering usability requirements and prototyping candidate user interface designs to meet those requirements 6 Click the Work Products tab and in the Mandatory inputs section click Add The Select Dialog Work Products window opens In the plug in core tech common extend_sup expand technical_work_products select use_case_modeland click OK 7 You should still be on the Work Products panel In the Outputs section click Add Enter my in the name pattern field Select my_navmap and
229. fine a default configuration that defines the visible set of elements and relationships when the process is authored This process authoring configuration is referred to as the default configuration for the process and should define the set of method plug ins content packages and other processes from the method library that will be referred to by the process at some point 12 Click OK The process is created and the process editor opens 13 In the process editor under the Description tab document your process using the available text fields Tip You can use the Rich Text Editor to edit or enter the text for any field that has the rich text editor icon Click the symbol to access the rich text editor Click the icon again to close the rich text editor 14 Decide on your primary process authoring view You develop a process using three different views Work Breakdown Structure Define a work breakdown structure in your process Create iterations and activities first and populate your activities by applying tasks from your method content For more information about defining a work breakdown structure see Develop a Work Breakdown 174 Structure Team Allocation Define which teams and roles will participate in activities and find responsible work products and tasks from there For more information about teams and roles see Develop a Team Allocation Structure gt m Work Product Usage Define which work products
230. ft All Rights Reserved Page 33 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 4 Tutorials Contents Explore the EPF Composer Workbench Create Method Content Reuse Method Content Work With Processes Publish Method Content The tutorials can also found in EPF In the Workbench click on the Help menu in the main tool bar and then click on Help Contents Expand Eclipse Process Framework EPF Composer and expand Tutorials 4 1 Explore the EPF Composer Workbench This tutorial contains a brief summary of key concepts followed by five exercises Exercises in this tutorial are based on the Practices library available with EPF Composer Learning objectives Upon completion of this tutorial you should be able to do the following Use the buttons and menus that you will need for routine operations Use the two main perspectives to see different views of library content Drill down into a method library to see how library content is categorised Preview the resulting pages Time required The estimated time to complete this tutorial is about 45 minutes Lessons in this module Concepts If you are a new user of EPF Composer then this tutorial is an appropriate starting point You will explore the basic user interface features and experiment with s
231. g infre my_replace EPF_Practices configurations my_replace_tester my_plug in replace_test Task my_contributing_task my_plug in my_contrib EPF_Practices configurations my_contributing_task my_plug in contribution_test amp Task imy_extends_design_solution my my_extend EPF_Practices configurations my_extends_design_solution my_plug infextends_test 3 EE Infos 3 items i Discipline development_discipline my_ developmen EPF_Practices configurations development_discipline my_plug in Categories Discipli 6 Drill down into the content packages in the my_p ug in plug in by clicking the signs Clear the extends_test and replace_test content packages if you have created them in earlier tutorials Clearing these avoids conflicts that may occur because the same base element is affected by the method plug ins 7 Click the Views tab Any custom category can be added as a view to a configuration You can create any number of custom categories They are flexible in terms of the content that you can add to a custom category and in the order in which the content appears 8 Click Add View and add my_custom_category as a view in the configuration Experiment with adding other custom categories as views 9 Make my_custom_category the default view by selecting the my_custom_category tab and clicking Make Default 10 Save the configuration by closing the configuration editor 11 In the configuration selection box at
232. g names will be shown mp m Method Content amp Content Packages RA 1dle_assignenents af Pullerns are separated by comma where at string 7 eny ceracter x 3 Roles amp Tasks gt assess results assign role Vartablity elements for assess_resuns cssign_sole manage Itertion assign rate practios momt ferathes_dev assign plan_heration asign_role m ro e_assignnents I Work Products gt assess results assign role Contributes to assess_results in practice mont iterative debase Guidare practice momt Reratho_dev bave Standard Categories Custom Categaries D Processes practice sk_value_lilecyde base m itnrative_deeeetopment amp Capabilky Patterns wm risk value_lifecyde s Delivery Processes assess results edditions Contributes to nesees_results in practice momt tterative_dev base hme t releuse_clanning amp risk_value_lifecyde i team hange mont amp whole_tean tech proves NAN publish Ere ONGUN Configarations Determine success of failure of the iteration Apply the lessons leaned lo modify the projed or improve the process Configuration F OK H Cancet 3 You can expand all or collapse all associations by using the and a buttons above the tree browser 4 You can either click once and click OK or double click any element to open the appropriate editor for that type of element Related topics Method Cont
233. ght 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 108 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Although a method content package is a container for method elements its structure is enhanced by assigning standard and custom categories to its elements Decomposition A method content package is a container for method content elements Tasks Roles Work Products Guidance How many containers Content Packages should there be ideally The question about decomposition and granularity was already an issue in the discussion about how many method plug ins is the right amount and the same question extends to Content Packages Just as there can be any amount of method plug ins in the Method Library there can be any number of Content Packages in each method plug in The question about the number and composition of Method Plug ins and Content Packages is particularly complex because of the method content variability feature of the EPF composer mimicking the object derivation in the software engineering The method plug ins can reference other plug ins thus extending them The method content elements in one content package can be linked to other method content elements in other content packages with the link having a variability type and in addition some method content elements can specify
234. he task descriptor page has information about the task as it is used at a specific point in a process The task descriptor has a link to the task on which it is based 5 Clicking on a role or work product in a task descriptor takes you to a Role Descriptor or a Work Product Descriptor These provide information about the role or work product at the same point in the process and provide links back to the core method element on which they are based 6 To view a Delivery Process in the Configuration view expand the tree node for Processes then Delivery Processes then OpenUP Lifecycle The display layout for a delivery process is similar to a capability pattern 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 42 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 4 1 5 Browse While Authoring The goal of this exercise is to browse some library content while in the Authoring perspective To browse in the authoring perspective 1 2 Switch to the Authoring perspective In the Library panel expand core gt default gt role def gt base gt Method Content gt Content Packages gt basic_roles gt Roles and double click the architect role Detailed information about this is displayed in the right hand panel Use the Preview tab at the bottom of the role win
235. he Capability Pattern folder node and select the process that will be linked to other activities through a variability relationship 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Select your process authoring view by clicking the Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation or the Work Product Usage tab 5 Inthe Configuration View expand the Processes and Capability Patterns folders node and select a capability pattern or its parts that you want to copy into 207 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 208 You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 212 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer an activity in a target process Note that you select and drag the parts you want to copy from the Configuration view and not the Library view 6 With the mouse drag the capabili
236. he Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Types of guidance Table 2 Guidance Element Types Term Description Checklist Identifies a series of items that need to be completed or verified Checklists are often used in reviews such as walkthroughs or inspections Concept s Outlines key ideas associated with basic principles underlying the referenced item Concepts normally address more general topics than guidelines and span across several work product tasks or activities Example Examples provide a model a representative form or a typical example of a completed work product Guideline Provides additional detail about how to perform a particular task or grouping of tasks or that provides additional details rules and recommendations about work products and their properties Among others a guideline can include details about best practices and different approaches for doing work about how to use particular types of work products information about different subtypes and variants of the work product and how they evolve throughout a lifecycle discussions about skills the performing roles should acquire or improve upon and measurements for progress and maturity Estimation Considerations Provides sizing measures or standards for sizing the work effort associated with performing a particular piece of work and i
237. he directory for the process and its contents are deleted Rename a process Capability pattern or delivery process The plugin xmi is modified The directory for the process is renamed Check in these changes as close together as possible Create rename or delete content package or process package The plugin xmi file is modified Note Content and process packages do not result in new directories being created in the file structure When you create a new package you may want to select it in your configuration This will cause configurations configurati on_name xmi to be modified Change the name of a process element Capability pattern or delivery process a The directory name for your CP DP is changed to match the new name The plugin xmi file is changed to reference the new directory name Change the Presentation Name of a method element or process The plugin xmi file is modified Refine the descriptive text for a method element all fields except the name presentation name or brief description a The method content xmi file is updated 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 258 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Action Impact
238. he process which are either unrelated to any method content or related to method content at a later point in time To create a capability pattern 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view panel for Processes and right click Capability Patterns select New gt Process Package and specify a name for the Process Package Library oe ae gt My Plug in i Method Content 9 Content Packages amp Standard Categories 13 Custom Categories igs Processes epp L fa organ New gt CG Process Package Configurations New Method Plug in Capability Pattern 3 After you have selected or created a Process Package right click Process Package and click New gt Capability Pattern The New Process Component window opens 4 Inthe Name field type a name for the capability pattern and select a default configuration from the drop down list Your process can contain content from many different method plug ins therefore you need to define a configuration that defines the visible set of elements and relationships when the process is authored This process authoring configuration is referred to as the default configuration for the process and should define the set 164 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing
239. hich accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer f By right clicking the surface of the diagram a window pops up which lets you add nodes and activities objects notes and text ES Develop Technical Vision identify and Outline Requirements Detail System Wide Requirements Add 5 D Note File Text 3 Activity Partition Edt Start Node x Select End Node 8 Arrange All E Fork Node Filters 3 Join Node z Decision Node View 3 Merge Node Zoom gt a ES Adivity te ies zs 7 amp Iteration eee ee A amp Phase Delete Diagram ck Milestone E Show Properties View t Task Descriptor Oval 4 Triangle Rectangle Diamond Pentagon amp Hexagon Octagon a Shadow Rectangle Rounded Rectangle 3D Rectangle Cylinder g In the menu toolbar click Diagram to have access to multiple sets of functionality 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 223 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer J Eclipse Process Framework Co File Edit Diagram Diagrang Search Configuration wi a A Font amp Fill Color gt Subay 4 Line Color gt fH met _ Line Style gt 4 4 pract ay a 8 proc 2 Select All gt publi
240. hod plug ins Export one or more method configuration specifications Click Next 4 Select a method configuration to export All referenced method plug ins in the selected configuration are included in the export Click Next The application will perform an integrity check and report possible errors 5 Specify a destination directory for the exported configuration Use Browse to navigate to the location for the export 6 Click Finish to begin the export process The export process will take a few seconds Related topics Export XML 27 Method library content can be exported in XML format You can choose to export the entire method library or select individual method plug ins for export 28 Method libraries can be comprised of content from many types of methods and whole families of different processes A method configuration defines a logical subset of a method library You use method configurations to define the scope of your authoring work and when publishing or exporting content 729 Method library content can be exported in XML format You can choose to export the entire method library or select individual method plug ins for export 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 242 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Publish Configu
241. ht of this section The Select Dialog Roles window opens 6 Select tester to be the base role Click OK to save changes and close the selection window 7 Save your changes by closing the role editor panel 8 Update my basic configuration by doing the following a Double click the my basic contiguration icon in the Library view panel The configuration editor opens 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 76 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer b In the Plug in and Package Selection tab expand my_plug in gt Method Content gt Content Packages c If they are checked clear contribution_test and extends_test d Check replace_test This should be the only content package selected in my_plug in This is done so that there are no conflicting extensions in the same method element e Close the configuration editor panel to save your changes 9 Now switch to the Browsing perspective 10 Expand Role Sets gt Basic Roles In the Configuration view you will see that there is no tester role in the Basic Roles folder It was replaced by the My Replace Tester role Also notice that other content elements in the base plug in that referenced the tester role now reference the replacing role instead If you open the Disciplines folder and vi
242. i on a gt Configuration my basic configuration Published Navigation Views Specify the views that will be included when this configuration is published To create a view click Add View to select any standard or custom category within the configuration The selected category will represent the view and the category s sub categories and content elements will represent the view s tree elements navigation_view_generic default management_practice_list a SP Iterative Development 2 SP Risk Value Lifecyde SP Release Planning X a P Whole Team 5 Team Change Management gi T Description Plug in and Package Selection Views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 92 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 10 11 12 13 14 One of the views can be made the default view by selecting the View and clicking Make Default The view selected will be the one displayed on top of all others when configuration is published as a Web site To summarise To create a view click Add View to select any standard or custom category within the configuration The selected category will represent the view and the category s sub categories and content elements will represent the view s tree elements Close the Co
243. iability 7 4 4 Extends and Replaces Variability The Extends and Replaces variability relationship combines the effects of Extends and Replaces variabilities into one variability type Whereas Replaces variability completely replaces all attributes and outgoing associations of the base element with new values and instances or removes all values or associations if the replacing element does not define any Extends and Replaces variability only replaces values that have been redefined All other values of the base element are unaffected In other words Extends and Replaces allows users to selectively replace specific attributes and associations of the base elements This type of variability can be used to generate method plug ins that rename elements or replace some descriptions of method elements with new ones without completely remodelling all other relationships and attributes needed by the base plug in 126 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 127 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements 8 A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into th
244. ibutes or other association in the base If the base element is defined with an existing association to exactly one other element the existing association will not be replaced by a contributor s association Contribution rules Outgoing associations from the contributing element are added to the base element Incoming associations from the contributing element are added to the base element Attributes from the contributing element are appended to the base element except for identifying or naming attributes and non textual attributes such as Boolean or date A base element can receive contributions from multiple elements Contributions are transitive This means a contributing element that has its own contributing elements will add them to the base Exceptions All contributing associations are many to many except for the following Work products can only be assigned to a single domain When contributing to a work product if the work product at the base is assigned to a domain the relationship to domain from the contributor is ignored There is no exception when contributing to domain elements A complete list of all possible associations is provided on the Associations Impacted by Variability page Add a contribution association 1 Use the Content Variability section on the Description tab to make an element contribute to another element 2 Select Contributes as the Variability type and then select the base element t
245. ick Copy to make a working copy Click Skip to continue editing the default library in the current location The editing capability for the default library is restricted by the access _ permissions enforced by your platforms D epf composer epf_jvork_practices Again this message tells you although not very clearly that you have the choice between using the files in the epf_work_practices folder or creating a separate folder and copying the files over In the latter case you would have two copies In our case since we clicked on Copy when we installed the files the first time the files in the epf_work_practices folder are already a copy of the files in the ep practices folder Since we do not need an additional copy of the copy of the original files we therefore click on the Skip button to load the already existing method library in the default working folder epf_work_practices 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 23 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer An option for turning off this feature would be useful Most of the time the user simply wants to open a method library and going through this form should not be necessary It would seem that simply copying a folder or files using the operating syste
246. ifying the process for the projects The Process Configurator uses the configuration publishing functionality in this tool to Create and modify configurations Publish configurations or processes Practitioner A Practitioner s goal is to use correctly the organisation s processes and best practices effectively A Practitioner uses a published configuration on a regular basis driven by the work being performed to view processes and methods 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 269 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 13 Glossary Activity Activities are the main building blocks for processes An activity is a collection of work breakdown elements such as task descriptors role descriptors work product descriptors and milestone Activities can include other activities Activities can be presented in work breakdown structures and activity diagrams that graphically describe the flow of work by showing which activities precede other activities Phase and iteration are special types of activities that define specific properties Artefact An artefact is a tangible work product that is consumed produced or modified by one or more tasks Artefacts may be composed of other artefacts For example a model artefact can be composed of mode
247. ights Reserved Page 237 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer i Publish Method Configuration Select publishing options Select the publishing options These options will be used to customize the look and behavior of the published website Title and links Title About content Feedback URL http www published_website com feedback Glossary and index C Publish glossary C Publish index Look and Feel Banner image Validation C Check external hyperlinks L Convert broken hyperlinks to plain text Diagrams C Publish activity detail diagrams that have not been manually created C Publish activity diagrams for unmodified activity extensions Layout C Show relationship sub folders in navigation trees C Show related elements for roles tasks and work products in navigation trees C Show task descriptors in navigation trees C Include method content in descriptor pages C Publish process usage in role task and work product pages linking to related descriptors Show all indirect green occurrences in extended patterns Default tab for activity pages Work Breakdown Structure l 7 Select options for Title and Links Title The title is displayed in the title bar of the browser showing the published site About content Select
248. ilable under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer ick aeea Gaa Eed fo alc Method Content 4m Content Packages Standard Categories Custom Categories 5 amp Processes amp Capability Patterns aa Delivery Processes Gs Configurations A method plug in can be standalone and without reference to other plug ins It can also reuse the content created in other plug ins by referencing them and modifying or extending the content or adding its own content to the other plug ins A method plug in can also play a purely supporting role Supporting method plug ins provide reusable content for other method plug ins The content stored in a supporting method plug in is only visible and published for a method configuration if other content which is not in a supporting plug in references it For example you maintain a list of standardised work products for your organisation in a supporting method plug in You only want to publish these work products when they are actually used by other plug ins such as the ones that define the method content and processes for a specific category of projects Hence if any elements in these plug ins such as a task modelling having a relationship to such a work product as an input or output then the work product will be published Other work products of that supporting plug in that are not used by your content will not
249. ime To create a delivery process 8 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 9 Expand the folder node in the Library view panel for Processes and right click Capability Patterns select New gt Process Package and specify a name for the Process Package a Library amp E e gt My Plug in Method Content i Content Packages 2 Standard Categories 4S Custom Categories gt amp Processes a Capability Patterns Delivery Processes i Configurations New y E gt Process Package li New Method Plug in Delivery Process 10 After you have selected or created a process package right click it and then Click New gt Delivery Process 11 In the Name field type a name for the delivery process and then select a default configuration from the drop down list 171 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 12 Process Packages provide visual groupings of processes 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 199 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Your process can contain content from many different method plug ins therefore you need to de
250. in the case of MS Windows with for example a folder name like epf_work_practices Afterwards having switched back to the EFP application you click on Browse and navigate so that it points to the new epf_work_practices folder You then click OK which brings you back to the pop up Copy Library window and you click on Copy and wait a few seconds The workbench screen has now changed The title bar shows the path and the name of the working folder 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 15 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 10 EPF Workbench Screen B Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer epf_work_practices Jeg File Edit Search Configuration Window Help BY Select a configuration migi OR O E Authoring Library amp egy oo Tim core meth_mgmt amp practice process publish Configurations Configuration ge Yo 2 2 3 OpenUP Library The OpenUP Library is included in the EPF Practices and does not need to be installed separately The link simply brings you to the EPF Practices page Published OpenUP web pages The UpenUP web pages are however available for download Extract the files from the openup_published 1 5 0 4 20091008 zip
251. in or creating a new method plug in Related topics Authoring Perspective Method Plug in 6 9 Create a Method Plug in Steps to Create Plug in All method content is organised in method plug ins contained in a method library To create a new method plug in 4 Make sure that you are in the Authoring Perspective 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 130 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 5 You can begin the method plug in creation process in one of three ways a Click File gt New gt Method Plug in E Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer Ble Edit Search Configuration Window Help New gt Method Library FS Open gt sb Method Plug in E3 Method Configuration r Other b In the Library view either right click Configurations and select New Method Plug in or right click an existing method plug in and select New Method Plug in from the pop up menu c Click the Down Arrow of the New icon i in the toolbar and select Method Plug in from the drop down list Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer e Elle Edit Search Configuration Window Help cis Select a configuration w i OP ite a gt Project Method Library gt Method Plug in J Method
252. in or method element or modify an existing element a symbol is displayed left to the name of the plug in or element in the tab indicating that it needs to be saved There are four ways to save an it m Close the editor and confirm you want to save Click the disk icon in the toolbar Use the shortcut ctrl s Click File gt Save A folder named pi_my_first_plug_in is created in the method library folder If you rename the name of the method plug in later the folder name will change correspondingly 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 133 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The Library view now contains Be E l Processes 3 Configurations Once expanded the method plug in shows the standard structure of all method plug ins Library EF an pi_my_first_plug_in m4 Method Content i Content Packages Standard Categories Disciplines ioe Domains 8 Work Product Kinds C2 Role Sets Tools c2 Custom Categories Processes amp Capability Patterns a Delivery Processes ta Configurations Se ers E3 Configuration a N Each of these concepts will be explained in the following chapters Related topics Authoring Perspective Method Plug in Meth
253. inian i e e e EE EEVEE 189 8 3 3 Nested Custom Cate Sores s csecsascssesnctcs pii E E eases RE S 190 8 3 4 Deep Copy Custom Categories eececcescssecseesseeseseeeeeeeesseeeeeeecssecsaecaecsaecsaecseeeaeseneeegs 191 8 4 Assign Categories to Content Elements eee ecesseeesecsseceseceseceeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeenaeenaes 191 8 4 1 Assign Cate S Ory vc sciseitisd ccecsstaesensenevies ET vac ssss dbeetochsvdasscbivesesd avi RENERE OEE EENE Ei 192 8 4 2 Modify Category Assignment eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecesecesecaecaecaessaecsuessaessaeseeeeeeseeeegs 193 5 Category Variability sinisen a nisn enr nan be EEE EE EE esas ise 193 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 4 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 9 CREATE PROCESSES 0 6 9 1 Create Capability Patterns ic ciisieciaiveesisisdensedidess ad scitebs eien a a 196 9 2 Create Delivery Processes 000 ceeceecescesseceseseseceseeeseeesneecaeesaecsaecsaecsaeesseeseeseeeseneeees 199 9 3 Develop Work Breakdown Structures 0 eceeceeseeseeeseecneeceaeceaeceaeceaeceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 201 9 4 Develop Team Allocation Structures cece eceeseeseeseeeseecsseceseceseesseeseesseesseeseneeees 203 9 5 Develop Work Product Usage Structures 0 0 eeeeceeseesecsseceseceseceseeseeeeeeeseeeenee
254. ink displays the element name and type Method element with custom text The link displays user defined text To define this text manipulate the text in between the lt a gt lt a gt tags in the URL text field after you select an element using Browse 3 To insert a hyperlink to an external URL from the Type drop down list select URL and in the URL field type the URL details and click OK 4 To insert a hyperlink to a file in the Type drop down list select File enter the file name or browse to find the file The file that you select is copied from its source into the method library It will be included in the Web site upon publication 5 Each time you add a link you can choose to have the target open in the same browser window or in a new window Click OK to close the window and insert the link Related topics Rich Text Editor 113 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 164 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 4 Method Content Variability Method content v
255. into the definition of the Use Case artefact and the Actor artefact To create a sub artefact right click an artefact in the Library view and select New gt Artefact A new artefact editor is opened and the artefacts are displayed in a hierarchy in the Library view Note When applying a decomposed artefact to a process the child artefacts are also shown in the process breakdown structure You can remove parts for the process as well as removing the sub artefact descriptors in the process editor 15 Click the Preview tab to view the newly created work product You can save it by closing the editor Related topics Method Plug in Configuration View Rich Text Editor Method Content Variability Method Content 90 91 92 93 94 All content is organized in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organize your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web sit
256. invoke the editor The description now has text that you included in the contributing artefact You will see it appended to the appropriate fields in the customised test case E Content a Goose eea7a Artifact Test Case Test Case This artifact is the specification of a set of test inputs execution F conditions and expected results identified for the purpose of making an evaluation of some particular aspect of a scenario Hit Santributing Brief Domains Test Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections Purpose The purpose of this artifact is to e provide a way to capture test inputs conditions and expected results for a system e systematically identify aspects of the software to test e specify whether an expected result has been reached based on verification of a system requirement set of requirements or scenario Contributing Purpose Back to top 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 69 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer This is another example of using contributes variability to customise content in a dependent plug in by making changes to the base plug in 4 3 4 Contribute to a Task The goal of this exercise is to extend a task by adding a cont
257. ion and click OK b To reassign a category to a new parent category or the top level categories folder i Right click the custom category and select Reassign The Reassign dialog opens ii From the tree view choose the categorised element destination and click OK 161 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 162 Method content and process elements are organised into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of categories standard and custom 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 190 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer c To unassign a category that is a sub category of more than one parent category i Right click the custom category and select Unassign If this category is its last occurrence in the method plug in the Remove dialog will open and warn you that the entire category will be deleted ii Select Yes to confirm If other parent categories still r
258. istribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Extends and replaces association rules Extends and Replace variability combines the effects of the Extends and the Replaces variabilities The evaluation first performs the effects of the Extends and then the effects of the Replaces variability This implies that First the new element will inherit all attributes and associations from the base element Second the new elements might override inherited attributes or associations Third the base element will be replaced with new element using the overridden values and if no override was specified keep the inherited values If the extends and replaces element defines outgoing associations they replace all outgoing associations of the base elements If the extends and replaces element does not define any new associations the resulting element retains the associations of the base element Incoming associations from the base element are added to the replacing element If the extends and replaces element defines attributes these attributes are replaced in the resulting element including the base element s identifier Undefined attributes retain values used in the base element The base element of a replaces relationship or an extends and replaces relationship can have only one replaces or extends and replaces element per configuration If more than one element is present no replacement takes place The ext
259. istribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer b Select the step that you want to move down c Click Down d See the results on the Preview tab 4 2 8 Create Guidance Elements The goal of this exercise is to create a guidance element Guidance elements are supplementary free form documentation There are fourteen guidance element types Checklist Concept Example Guideline Estimation Consideration Practice Report Reusable Asset Roadmap Supporting Material Template Term Definition Tool Mentor and White Paper For this task we will create a representative guidance element in this case a checklist After you have done this you can try authoring additional guidance types In a checklist check items are created in the same way as steps in a task are created by using the Check Items tab in the checklist editor To create guidance elements 1 In the Library view under my_content_package right click Guidance and select New gt Checklist 2 Name the guidance my_create_physical_appearance_checklist and enter the presentation name My Create Physical Appearance Checklist 3 Use the Check Items tab to add the following check items a Create branding specifications Define physical specifications 4 Close the guidance editor and save the new checklist 5 Go back to the task you created in the previous exercise and add the new checklist to my_prototype_user_interface Recall that you do this b
260. ite contains many keywords A faster navigation among the keywords is possible The value of this parameter together with the value of the parameter wwwroot shall be a valid path for a file This parameter is optional indexresultfile index navig htm If this parameter and the parameter mainresultfile shortcuts to the first keyword of each letter will be generated into this file A faster navigation among the keywords possible The value of this parameter together with the value of the parameter wwwroot ise a valid path for a file This parameter is optional keywordresultfile index contents ht m The actual keyword index is written into this file The value of this parameter together with the value of the parameter wwwroot is a valid path for a file This parameter is mandatory maintitle Index Rational Unified Process The title of the main index page This parameter is optional The default value is Index Rational Unified Process 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 181 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Parameter Setting Description target ory_doc The name of the target in which the html documents containing the actual keywords is to be shown This parame
261. ity detail diagrams automatically To set this option as the default whenever you open the publishing wizard select Publish activity detail diagrams that have not been created in process editor This setting also generates activity detail diagrams when you browse your process in the tool When this option is selected EPF Composer publishes an Activity Detail Diagram for every activity It creates these diagrams and publishes them with a default auto layout If the option is cleared then only the Activity Detail Diagrams that a user has manually created in the Process editor and saved with a custom layout are published 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 234 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Process Authoring Overview Method Configurations Overview Create Capability Patterns Create Delivery Processes Working with Process Diagrams Working with Activity Diagrams Working with Activity Detail Diagrams Working with Work Product Dependency Diagrams 225 6 225 You can create process diagrams to illustrate the relationships between processes When you publish a method Web site you can choose whether or not to include these diagrams 226 Activity detail diagrams show the tasks to be performed
262. ive fashion The base appears in the published Web site but the contributing element does not In and out relationships from the contributing element are added to the base Text from the contributing element is appended to corresponding base sections 16 Method content is organised into content packages that are contained in method plug ins 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 110 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element Replaces A replacing element replaces parts of the base element The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties The replacer appears in the published Web site but the base element does not Out Relationships in the replacer are left untouched and those of the base element are ignored In Relationships from the base are added to the replacer Text in the replacer is left untouched and the base element s text is ignored Extend An extending element inherits
263. k Yes to lock the needed files If a file is currently being edited by another user a window opens with the option to continue or not To avoid needing to merge the files later click No and stop deleting that element 5 Click File gt Save g Team Synch 6 Switch to the Team Synchronising perspective wie a 7 Make sure that the element that you deleted in Step 4 is listed with other dependent files 8 Select the top level folder for your project and click Commit Related topics Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to Cysirror Bookmark not defined Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 7 Edit Elements under CVS You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why These steps apply to elements such as roles tasks work products guidance categories configurations capability patterns and delivery processes To track changes with CVS Make sure that you are using the Authoring perspective La Authoring Use the tree browser to choose the element that you want to edit Double click the element to open it in the editor window In the Send an Edit Notification to CVS window click Yes to lock the needed files If a file is currently being edited by another user a window opens wi
264. keywords After the prefix the keyword at level one follows If a keyword has more than one level a separator between the levels is needed The separator is specified in the input file to the application Then the next level follows Remember Space characters inside keywords must be replaced with _ characters In the generated index _ characters are converted back to space characters The following table shows examples of valid keyword definitions The centre column shows how the keywords are presented in the generated index Table 7 Table 1 Syntax for index keywords XE_Copyright Copyright lt a name XE_Copyright gt lt a gt Key WordIndex Input file syntax Syntax description XE_KeyWordIndex__Syntax_description XE_KeyWordIndex__Input_file_syntax lt a name XE_KeyWordIndex__Syntax_description gt lt a gt lt a name XE_KeyWordIndex__Input_file_syntax gt lt a gt XE_Users_guide__Chapter_1 aaa lt a name XE_Users_guide__Chapter_1 gt lt a gt XE_Users_guide__Chapter_2 Chapter 2 lt a name XE_Users_guide__Chapter_2 gt lt a gt Keywords must be manually entered into the file that contains the index target If you are using the rich text editor RTE switch to HTML editing mode to make these targets Index targets are created by adding an HTML anchor tag in front of the index target The general pattern is lt a name XE_ keyword gt lt a gt The previous table shows specific examp
265. king changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 152 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Note A work product can be included in one and only one Domain A domain is standard category any number of Work Product Kinds A Work Product Kind is a standard category and any number of custom categories 13 If the work product is a deliverable you can go to the Deliverable Parts tab and define what the deliverable consists of This part of the editor only appears for deliverables and it allows you to add other work products as part of the deliverable When you select a work product its brief description is displayed a Click the Deliverable Parts tab b To add work products click Add select the work products that you want to add and click OK c To remove a work product select it in the work products as deliverable parts field and then click Remove 14 If the work product is an Artefact you can define sub artefacts for it Artefacts can be composed of sub artefacts expressing that the definition of this artefact type is composed into sub artefact definitions which are part of the overall artefact For example the definition of a Use Case model is composed
266. ks specifically adding and removing guidance Guidance can be attached to any core method content or process element Guidance elements can be attached to other guidance elements To add and remove guidance elements 1 Locate the my_navmap artefact that you created earlier in this tutorial 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 58 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Double click the icon for my_navmap The artefact editor panel opens Click the Guidance tab Click Add The Select Dialog Guidance window opens a eN Add the guidance named visual_modeling from the core tech common extend_supp plug in To shorten the list enter v in the Name patterns box to filter the items that are displayed Note that you can use the Collapse All and Expand All buttons to change the way the tree is displayed Click OK after you make a selection G select Dialog Guidance Method Element Type Guidance a Name patterns matching names will be shown y Patterns are separated by comma where any string any character gt core tech common extend_supp A technical_quidance 5 8 Visual Modeling Guidance lLeesceorsvesnEEtavsesssesevserenstteed BA technical_resources templates reports examples E vision BA technic
267. l Method Composer when computing a method configuration for browsing or publishing Then all slots are filled with the concrete work products that are available in that method configuration 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 151 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer v Slots Information Select the slots that this artifact fulfills The feature is relevant for compatibility with the IBM Rational Method Composer See the Help Files for more information Leave the box unchecked 7 Inthe Main Description field type a more detailed description of the new work product The main description is a more detailed version of the description that you typed into the Brief Description field There are three ways to create text for the description Directly by typing it manually in the editor Copying from another similar work product and modifying using the editor Copying from an HTML source such as one of the other Web sites You can use the Rich Text Editor to edit or enter the text for any field that has the Rich Text Editor icon Click the icon to access the Rich Text Editor Click the icon again to close the Rich Text Editor For more information about the editor see Rich Text Editor 8 Under Notation enter notations about the Work Pro
268. l Rights Reserved Page 261 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To move objects around press the CTRL Right or the CTRL Left arrow keys Authoring Contents You can use the keyboard to navigate the Authoring perspective by using the following key combinations To expand or collapse a Library tree node press the Right or Left Arrow To move to the next topic node press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow To create a method element move to the element node and press the Application key If your keyboard does not have an Application key refer to information from your operating system vendor on adapting keyboards Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to navigate between menus press Enter to make the choice take effect Press Ctrl Tab to navigate between different sections of the element Ctrl PageUP PageDown to navigate between different tabs Element Editor You can use the keyboard to navigate in the rich text editing view for an element by using the following key combinations Press Enter to open the editing view Press Tab to navigate between sections of the editing view Press Shift Left Arrow or Shift Right Arrow to choose text Press Ctrl PageUp or PageDown to switch between the Rich Text and HTML tabs Process Editor You can use the keyboard to navigate in the process
269. l content is organized in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organize your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 68 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 70 Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customized to specific types of projects 71 A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a specific role The granularity of a task is generally a few hours to a few days and usually affects one or a small number of work products 2 A work product is a term that is used to describe task inputs and outputs 73 Guidance provides information
270. l elements which are also artefacts Roles use artefacts to perform tasks and to produce other artefacts Each artefact is the responsibility of a single role making responsibility easy to identify and understand and promoting the idea that every piece of information produced in a method requires the appropriate set of skills Even though only one role is responsible for an artefact other roles may use the artefacts Checklist A checklist is a specific type of guidance that identifies a series of items that need to be completed or verified Checklists are often used in reviews such as a walkthroughs or inspections Concept A concept is a specific type of guidance that outlines key ideas associated with basic principles underlying the referenced item Concepts normally address more general topics than guidelines and may be applicable to several work products tasks and activities Deep copy Deep copy is a mechanism for copying all inherited references from one activity to another Deep copy will resolve all references at all levels of extension For example if an activity contains an applied extended capability pattern which itself contains another capability pattern a deep copy would create local copies for all levels of nesting A normal copy would only copy the first level of nesting Deliverable A deliverable is a collection of work products usually artefacts Deliverables are used to define typical or recommended content in the
271. lable under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To export an XML 1 Click File and select t Export 2 Select Sei XML and click Next 3 Select the type of method library content to export Export the entire method library Export one or more method plug ins 4 If you chose to export one of the method plug ins a window opens so that you can select the method plug ins to export If you chose to export the entire method library skip the next three steps 5 Select the method plug ins to export and click Next 6 Review the dependencies for the method plug in that you are exporting Click Next 7 Confirm the export settings and click Next 8 Enter a name and location for the XML file and click Finish You can use Browse to navigate to the location of your choice Related topics Import XML Export to Microsoft Project Publish Configurations as Web Sites 10 8 Import XML Method content previously exported including by Rational Method Composer as an XML file can be re imported An imported XML file will become a method plug in with a configuration The import process requires a library You must open an existing library or create a new one before importing To import XML 1 Click File and click Import Select Sei XML Click Next Specify the XML file to be imported You can use Browse to navigate to the file 4
272. le under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Milestone A Milestone describes a significant event in a project such as a major decision completion of a deliverable or meeting of a major dependency such as the completion of a project phase Outcome An outcome is an intangible work product that may be a result or state Outcomes may also be used to describe work products that are not formally defined Phase A phase is a type of activity that represents a significant period in a project Phases typically conclude with a management checkpoint milestone or set of deliverable artefacts Practice A practice represents a proven way or strategy of doing work to achieve a goal that has a positive impact on work product or process quality Practices are defined orthogonal to methods and processes They could summarise aspects that impact many different parts of a method or specific processes Examples for practices would be manage risks continuously verify quality architecture centric and component based development to name a few Preview Preview displays method content in browser format similar to how it will appear to an end user browsing a published web site Report A report is a predefined template of a result that is generated on the basis of other work products as an output from some form of tool automation For example a report may combine
273. lement with the base element A replacing element replaces parts of the base element It provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties The replacer appears in the published Web site but the base element does not Out Relationships in the replacer are left untouched and those of the base element are ignored In Relationships from the base are added to the replacer Text in the replacer is left untouched and the base element s text is ignored Replaces An extending element inherits characteristics of the base element Both the extender and the base element appear in the published Web site Out relationships from the base are added to the extender In relationships in the extender are left untouched the base element s are ignored Text is added Extends from the base if the extender has no value defined for the given section X Provides a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions a This variability relationship combines the effects of extends and replace variability into one variability type a Whereas the replaces variability comple
274. lements It will also list only a subset of these related elements in the tree for example only output work products for tasks and not the inputs Show related elements for roles tasks and work products in navigation trees If this option is selected it will publish the roles tasks and work products together with their related elements Show task descriptors in navigation trees If this option is cleared EPF Composer creates a breakdown for all the activities of the published processes in the tree browser If selected it also includes the descriptor level into the tree browser 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 239 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Selecting this option has an impact on publication time and performance of the published site Include method content in descriptor pages If this option is selected it hides the distinction between method content elements and descriptors from the users of the published site All descriptors are published without using the word Descriptor as their type and all textual content and guidance relationships of the related method content elements Publish process usage in role task and work product pages linking to related descriptors When this option is selected all method con
275. les of this syntax Internal references Index entries can point to other index entries rather than a page in the published site These are internal references within the index itself In the following example the entry software architect under roles links to the second entry for software architect not to content page in the published site roles software architect software architect indexentry1 indexentry2 Internal references are collected in a separate file and follow a special syntax Each line in the file consists of two keywords with a tab character t separator The first keyword refers to the second keyword in the resulting index A keyword can only occur once as a referring keyword in the file The second keyword is only allowed to be a one level keyword The following table shows this relationship 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 180 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer XE_KeyWord__ Author XE_KeyWord__Copyright XE_Author XE_Copyright If the referring second keyword does exist in an HTML file the index entry is named See also entry will be named See If the referring second keyword does not exist in an HTML file index The previous example results in the following index
276. llel work They just represent different development approaches Hence for defining a process one can take method content and combine it into structures that specify how the work shall be 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 31 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer organised over time to meet the needs of a particular type of development project such as business transformation versus software for a online system supporting the business transformation EPF Composer supports processes based on different development approaches across many different lifecycle models including waterfall incremental and iterative life cycles EPF Composer also supports different presentations for process such as work breakdown structure or workflow presentations You can also define processes in EPF Composer that use a minimal set of method content to define processes for agile self organising teams The screen capture above shows an example of a process presented as a breakdown structure of nested activities as well as a workflow or activity diagram for one particular activity the inception phase It also indicates with the two blue arrows that the particular method content task Detail a Use Case has been applied in the process twice firstly in the inception
277. lows you to preview the published site s navigation views The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 149 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 22 Click the Roles tab This part of the editor allows you to define the roles that perform the task You should select a role as the primary performer for this task You can also add one or more roles as additional performers To add a role click Add select the role that you want to add and click OK To remove a role select it in the Primary performers or Additional performers boxes and click Remove When you select a role the brief description of that role is displayed 23 Click the Work Products tab This part of the editor allows you to define the
278. lp rt Select a configuration wa p AF milibrary 2 E s Method Content Processes i Configurations Method plug ins contain a Method Content sector represented with the icon BA and a Processes sector represented with the icon 6 The Method Content schema is structured in Content Packages Standard Categories Custom Categories The Library view shows the Method Content structure amp My Method Plug in gt Method Content Ga Content Packages e Standard Categories 2 Custom Categories gt l Processes Configurations Processes are structured into process fragments called capability patterns and full lifecycle processes called delivery processes A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work Method content and process elements are organised into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of category standard and custom 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 102 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made ava
279. lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 259 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Action Impact Comments Set or update activity relationships a The model xmi file is i predecessors extend modified copy The configuration a Be sure to add fi i name xmi file is created configurations Create a configuration under configurations configuration name xmi folder to source control a Be sure to delete configurations configuration name xmi in your version control system The configuration Delete a configuration name xmi file is deleted The configuration name xmi file is renamed to the new configuration name xmi Rename a configuration The configuration Modify a configuration name xmi file is modified Related topics Version Control for Specific Files Installing and Configuring cvs 11 3 Using Rational ClearCase IBM Rational ClearCase can be integrated with EPF Composer if a properly configured Rational ClearCase server is available The Rational ClearCase integration simplifies the task of managing a method library under version control After installing the appropriate version control adapters the authoring perspective is supplemented with the following features Autom
280. lues or association instances if the replacing element does not define any extends and replaces variability only replaces the values that have been redefined and leaves all other values of the base element as is You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements the complete hierarchy of variability associations for an element can be displayed graphically Related topics Associations Impacted by Variability TI4 Browsing Variability Relationships Contributes Variability Replaces Variability Extends Variability Extends and Replaces Variability 4 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements 15 A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 116 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 117 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a bas
281. lug in Method Configuration b In the Library view of the Authoring perspective right click the Configurations folder and click New gt Method Configuration c Click the Down Arrow of the New icon ri in the toolbar and select Method Configuration from the drop down list 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 139 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer e Elle Edit Search Configuration Window Help ci Select a configuration PEN 2 OP a se a gt Project Method Library gt Method Plug in amp Method Configuration r3 Other 3 Inthe Create a new method configuration dialog type a name and description for your configuration and click Finish The Configuration editor is opened and you will see your new configuration name in the Configurations folder in the Library view tree 4 At the bottom of the editor click the Plug in and Package Selection tab E Ame new config D Configuration my_new_config Configuration Content Select the method plug Ins content packages and processes that willl be induded in this corfiquretion O Re calaulale errors whenever configuration is ranged Configuration problem view options B Baj amp a
282. lug in Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective LBA Authoring 2 There are three ways to create a new method plug in Use one of the following a Click File gt New gt Method Plug in File New gt Method Library Open gt b Method Plug in 8 Method Configuration b Right click in the Library view and select New Method Plug in c Click the Down Arrow of the New icon ri in the toolbar and select Method Plug in from the drop down list fe Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer e File Edit Search Configuration Window Help ci Select a configuration AER E OSs Xe i a O Project Per Method Library gt Method Plug in Method Configuration w r3 Other 3 Inthe New Method Plug in wizard provide a name for the new method plug in In this instance we will call it my_plug in 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 47 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Note We will refer to this method plug in by name in many of the following exercises so be sure to enter it exactly as shown Enter text into the Brief description field It is always a good idea to add brief descriptions to new method elements as you create them In the Referenced Plug ins panel select pu
283. m offers the same functionality However on the other hand most users will not change libraries frequently once they have mastered the product 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 24 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 3 Introduction You will find material that can help you getting started on http www eclipse org epf general getting started php Papers m Who will benefit from EPF Introduction to OpenUP EPF Composer Overview Part 1 EPF Composer Overview Part 2 Tutorials An Introduction to EPF Customisation scenarios with EPF Composer and OpenUP Recorded Presentations and Demos General Overview Method Content Authoring m What is new to EPF Composer 1 2 Raindance Web site EPF Wiki Demo Site feel free to use the new demo resource and to share it with others Presentations and publications EPF Composer 1 2 New and Noteworthy EPF Short Tutorial at EclipseCon 2007 m OMG Process Modelling Special Interest Group PM SIG What is EPF EPF An Open Source Process Initiative m Open Unified Process Distilled Increasing Development Knowledge with EPF Composer A Development Library At Your Fingertips Building embedded software with EPF
284. m a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 141 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 12 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 176 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer packages with variability elements related to the selected element For each element you can see an icon indicating the element s type name and variability associations shown in parentheses E Bore a Fi ESON oy Score east GiSelect Dialog choosing variability elements for assess_results a gt amp practice Method Element Type AB Content Elements a mgmt amp terate dov Name patterns matchin
285. m category that you want to rename and select Rename The Rename dialog is displayed 2 Inthe New name text field enter a name for the custom category and click OK The custom category is displayed in the Library view with the new name Tip You can also rename a custom category using the method element editor double click the custom category and enter the new name in the Name text field Related topics Authoring Perspective Configuration View Method Content Categories Custom Categories Method Configurations Overview 8 3 3 Nested Custom Categories You can organise custom categories in a hierarchy which means that you can create a category as a child of another category Child categories can be referenced by more than one parent category In the hierarchy you are building nested custom categories that can use operations such as Assign or Reassign to influence the structure of that hierarchy To change the assignment of custom categories in a hierarchy of categorised elements For example to reassign a sub category to a new or additional parent category you can use either the Library view or the method element editor To change the assignment of custom categories 1 To change assignments by using the Library view a To assign a category to an additional parent i Right click the custom category and select Assign The assign dialog opens ii From the tree view choose the categorised element destinat
286. ment and selecting New For example if you wanted to create a new role in a content package you would right click the Roles folder in the tree navigator and select New gt Role In the current case you will create a Work Product There are three types of work products artefacts outcomes and deliverables An artefact is a tangible work product that is consumed produced or modified by one or more tasks Artefacts may be composed of other artefacts An outcome is an intangible work product that may be a result or state It may also be used to describe work products that are not formally defined A deliverable is a collection of work products usually artefacts used to define typical or recommended content in the form of work products packaged for delivery 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 49 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To create a work product under your content package 1 Right click Work Products and select New then select a work product type such as Artefact 2 The work product editor is displayed Enter the following information a In the Name field enter my_navmap b In the Presentation name field enter My Navigation Map c Enter a brief description about this work product in the Brief Description field
287. mes called custom categories for your content with your own user defined categories that allow you to index the content in any way you want Categories are used to create navigation views for the final published Web site Standard Categories Standard categories provide a means to categorise method content in line with best practices for creating structured methods 9 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 20 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 112 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Bi Library 2 a age 3 8 pi_my_new_plug_in BA Method Content gt sa Content Packages BA cp_my_new_content_package ES Roles i Tasks ise Work Products Guidance Bi First Content Package 2 Disciplines ae Domains 8 Work Product Kinds
288. method plug in 1 Create a new supporting material element for the new copyright information 2 Associate this new element with the Copyright field for the specific element Related topics Copyright Notices Create Copyright Notice Change Default Copyright Notice Method Content Variability 150 You can specify the default copyright for all elements in a particular method plug in by using the method plug in editor 151 You can specify the default copyright for all elements in a particular method plug in by using the method plug in editor 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 179 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 6 Method Content for Publishing 7 6 1 Create Index Entries Index entries are created by adding a special HTML anchor tag next to the target for the index entry The anchor tag should start with the characters XE_ followed by a keyword Keywords are collected into a file and are displayed in alphabetical order Keyword syntax The syntax of a keyword is prefix evel1 levelseparator level2 Each keyword starts with a prefix The prefix is specified in the input file to the application A keyword can consist of one or more levels A keyword with more than one level is useful when you would like to group different
289. mi file is changed Need to place new directory and new plugin xmi file under version control a Be sure to check in the new plugin xmi before checking in library xmi Delete a plug in The entire directory for the plug in is deleted The library xmi file is changed Rename a plug in The name of the plug in directory is changed The library xmi file is changed Check in these changes as close together as possible checking in the directory name change first followed by library xmi Move a content element to another plug in File moves from one directory to another The plugin xmi file for both plug ins changes Check in all changes as close together as possible checking in the plugin xmi file last Create a new method content element task role work product guidance custom categories or standard category A new method content xmi file is created and added to version control if one or more rich text fields of the element are populated The library xmi file is changed Need to place the new file under version control before checking in plugin xmi Note Each method content xmi is placed in a specific folder for each content type For example method content xmi for role is placed in roles folder Change the name of a method content element task role work product guidance custom category or standard category The lt method conte
290. mpanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Capability Patterns Reuse Create Delivery Processes Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element Properties View Activity Variability Types Rich Text Editor 9 5 Develop Work Product Usage Structures In the Work Product Usage view you can create a process by defining which work products will be created and used in the process and then finding responsible roles and tasks from there You can also review the work products in a process that has been created by adding tasks or roles to the process Before you create a work product usage structure ensure that the configuration selected in the tool bar is the same as the configuration that you selected as the default configuration for your process To develop a work product usage structure 1 To access the work product usage editor in the process editor click the Work Product Usage tab Note For the purposes of this topic the breakdown element example used is Activity Other breakdown elements include but are not limited to Phase and Iteration The element that you use depends on the scope of the process that you create 2 Right click the element either a Capability Pattern or Delivery Process to which you want to add structure and click New Child gt Activity to create a new activity If needed create more activities to set up your bre
291. n checking packages You can use the resulting configuration as your working set for your EPF Composer work The actual content of the configuration i e the included method content and process elements are always accessible in the configuration view Use the combo box in the toolbar to select the currently used method configuration Publishing overview Method configurations are the basis for publishing method content and processes A published configuration is an HTML web site that presents all the method content and processes of the method configuration in a navigable and searchable way It uses the relationships established during method content and process authoring to generate hyper links between elements as well as provides tree browsers based on the configuration view and user defined categorisations of the content For publishing simply create and select a configuration The publication wizard will do the rest for you and only publish content that is part of the method configuration It will also automatically adopt content to the configuration such as removing references of method content elements to elements outside of the configuration or removing activities from your processes that only contain work defined outside of the configuration set Hence publishing will only include the content that you really need You can always preview a published configuration using the browsing perspective 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tu
292. n created in process editor option when you publish your configuration But it seems that they are generated automatically in any case and that the option only affects the publishing of the diagram 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 227 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 You can modify the activity detail diagram by editing it in the diagram editor There are multiple ways to access to the diagram editing options a Draw or modify the activity detail diagram using the editor Palette You can set different options for the palette by right clicking in the palette area to access a pop up window with different options b There is a button bar on the top for editing You select the objects and click on the edit buttons to change the appearance c The activity diagram Properties view contains three tabs Appearance Rulers amp Grid and Advance tabs with options for editing the diagram d By clicking the Geometric Shapes in the palette shapes become visible and they can be added to the diagram e By right clicking the surface of the diagram a window pops up which lets you add nodes and activities objects notes and text Add gt Note File E Tex Edit eee Triangle B Select gt i Rectangle Filters g
293. n the Library View 4 Inthe Presentation name field type a presentation name The presentation name is the name that is shown in your published content and in the Configuration view You can also make this name appear in the Library view by toggling the Show Presentation Names 4 button in the Library view toolbar 5 In the Brief Description field type a short description of the new work product 6 Inthe Slots Information section select the Is Work Product Slot check box to make the work product a slot or alternatively click the Add button and select one or more work product slots to fulfil your work product 84 85 86 87 88 A role defines a set of related skills competencies and responsibilities of an individual or individuals A work product is a term that is used to describe task inputs and outputs Guidance provides information about how to perform a role how to create a work product how to perform your task and so on The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organized into sets of method plug ins and configurations A work product slot is an abstract work product that represents a placeholder for concrete work products Concrete work products can fulfil one or more work product slots Fulfilment is modelled in Rational Method Composer as a relationship from the concrete work product to the work product slot Fulfilment is realised by Rationa
294. nd Use Cases 3 Task Descriptor Serstand Stakeholder I Z e p D rup_cots padage_delvery D Define the System 19 Activity 2 Pr ey a rup_j2ee_plug_in C Detal a Use Case 2 Task Descriptor Workfl a D rup se x amp System Analyst 21 Primary Performer Role Descriptor i orktiow lt gt amp Requrements Specter 22 Secondary Performer Role Desorpter E D Use Case 23 Mandatory Input Artfact Configuration le Glossary 24 Optonal Input Artfact Define the System config_for_PH_besic Use Case Model 25 Optional Input Artifact D aparea G m __ E Use Case 25 Artfact Detal a Use C Vison 27 Optional Input Artfact Detal the Software S Storyboard 28 Optional Input Artifact D Develop Requrements L Stakeholder Requests 29 Optional Inout Artifact Develop Vision Use Case 3 uyut Artfact ohare Dense j RO Prioritize Use Cases 31 Task Descriptor basa Find Actors and Use Case BB Other work 8 aiy 19 D Manage Dependences r e ED Matata Cases Refine the System Definiton 5 Acity Review Req rements i Detal a Use Case s ask Descriptor an D strucure the Use Case N gt Reqarements Specter 47 Primary Performer Role Descrptor s Test a Use Case 48 Mandatory Input Artfact ae tegorized Tasks Iteration Plan 4 Mandatory Input Artfact eS Gossary 0 Optional input Artfact go gt Stakeholder Requests St Optenal Inout artifact a Analysis and O gt Use Case Model 52 Optonal input Artfact CB be _ R Use case 33 Artifact
295. nda Task d issh dss ii ei hen pied Sa SE hi A Aa 74 4 3 8 Replaced Roles canst ind dain vada and dundee 76 4 3 9 Extend and Replace a ROW w scc scisccs cise cs sevesece vant ect evecis cessuscbshesvapevasvladvenstuasscesseessevenevsoceens 77 dd Work wath Processes seniii E as 79 ASA CONCEPIS e E E A A E E E E E E asthssteebeuels 80 4 4 2 Browse Process Content 2isiscciscvscssssevee cesvstveuevssen hiessseustanseudeavtesvocesscnulueatvettvsnasetitedsassbeveessss 81 44 3 Create a Delivery Process sccsieiricnersoeir ipning aie E EEE E E R E EER 82 AAA Use Capability Patterns seo ciciren eneo aae EEE E R ER E 85 4 4 3 Createa Process Di graiococsirteeceenier ookan RE E E R AERE 86 4 5 Publish Method Conttent ccc ccc cesesegscaosasceettesacecsdeaneqd sods se ssvsensedenvebeceseuiueesudesseesutonaes 88 A SAd CONCEPtS nanara E E E Gai zeadecaseuses Sadgboes she veces eben 89 4 5 2 Publish a Method Configuration 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeseeeecesecesecesecsacesecsaecaecaeseseseeeeeeeeeaegs 90 45 3 Create a Custom Category sceiscosccesssascesvecnscousunscozecesweceessonsstewssnsesutangsauedicguvesessesstestes EADS 93 4 5 4 Create a Method Configuration eee csecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecesecaecaecaesaaesaeeeaeeeneeees 94 4 5 5 Publish a Custom Method Configuration cece eeeeceecceeeceeeceecesecsaecsaecneeseeseeeaeeeneeees 97 5 KEY CONCEPTS 99 Sel Method Library Schema sii ss ce roires rien eein es oE Eres N RN EEEE RENEE 99 3 2 Method Li
296. nerate a Web site based on a method configuration 7331 You can export a method configuration and all its method plug ins or export one or more method configuration specifications 232 Method library content can be exported in XML format You can choose to export the entire method library or select individual method plug ins for export 233 You can export a capability pattern or delivery process as an XML file that can be opened in Microsoft Project This XML file contains links to specific pages in the original method library 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 243 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Export XML Export to Microsoft Project 10 6 Import a Method Plug in The import process requires a library You must open an existing library or create a new one before importing To import a method plug in 1 Click File gt Import The Import wizard opens 2 Select Method Plug ins and click Next 3 Specify the directory containing the method plug ins to import You can use Browse to navigate to the location of the file There are two options for importing Check base plug ins Ignore and remove unresolved references 4 Review the changes that will be made to the current method library Click Finish
297. nfiguration editor You will be prompted to save your changes if you made any In the main tool bar use the Configuration menu and select Publish Select my basic configuration and click Next Step through Publish Method Configuration wizard accepting the defaults and publish the method configuration You may want to use your own title on the Select publishing options page It will take a few minutes to generate the Web site When the generation is complete the Web browser applet launches so that you can view the resulting published Web site Accept the security warnings when the browser launches Note The published Web site has a richer organisation and layout compared to the simpler view of content shown in the Configuration view 4 5 3 Create a Custom Category The goal of this exercise is to use the custom categories feature To create a custom category 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective Expand the node in the Library view panel for my_p ug in then expand the Method Content folder If you have not already created this method plug in create it now or go through the Create Method Content tutorial Create a custom category named my_custom_category Right click the Custom Categories folder select New gt Custom Category Click the Assign tab and click the Assign button The Select Dialog Most common window opens If you have previously created content
298. ns are built from subsets of elements in the method library Method configurations represent the various products such as cars that can be assembled from parts in the warehouse While most cars require unique parts that are used by a specific model but the warehouse has large numbers of parts that can be used in more than one model When a new method library is created it has initially no method plug ins and an empty configuration Related topics Method Content Elements Content Categories Capability Patterns Method Configurations 5 3 Method Plug in All method content is organised in method plug ins contained in a method library A method plug in is a container for method and process content The method plug in has the following structure or schema 7 Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customised to specific types of projects 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 101 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 3 Eclipse Process Framework Composer File Edit Search Configuration Window He
299. nse V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 You can review the information for each method element in the Properties view You may have to select and right click the method element and select the Show Properties View to open the Properties view gt Mp DS raver tation Maree Sakona Made iria Trpe Harned narb Mib aureko Orgsrg Berl Otver Ostend Shyer 0 Deahey Sores ripio 1 Phas T hres 2 Adnty Develop Trcbaical Vuan Tak Desert per a GOP and OvbreReaiereets 4 Tak Desai gtr gt Dual Shi Wile oteto S Task Deo peer Cee Prk Badhar Stucke Tea Abocober Work odia Usa Cariodd View Task Deseniptor detall_syetor wide requirements GEA Irdermeton General Mionna danai en Provide gera Infor ravian about his tack donpkr Ged Nase Setal_epten_obde_regatererts Petes Prewridion tere Ovtal Suter Wik Aspirator Werk Precis Options Melly unat s Pevrad ane ve kha Litegero Tath Indre Prevectatiot tare Teee sub mper Pl awcheoptnad wit saas Mabed ted Usk Mehod Teresi chee 9 Customise the steps from the Detail System Wide Requirements task for the Inception phase Click the Detail System Wide Requirements task descriptor and open the Properties view Click the Steps tab 10 Notice that there are three steps for this task a Detail system wide requirements a Detail glossary terms Achieve concurrence 11 Remove the last two steps close the Properties view and save the My DP 12
300. nships are defined 748 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 2 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 249 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 11 1 4 Add a Method Plug In to CVS Adding new method plug ins to CVS version control allows multiple authors to work separately You must add your library to version control before performing the following steps To add a method plug in to CVS Authori Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective ma i Click File gt New gt Method Plug in In the Send an Edit Notification to CVS window click Yes to lock ibrary xmi for editing If the file is currently being edited by another user a window opens with the option to continue or not Click No so that you do not need to merge the files later Exit the operation 4 Inthe New Method Plug in window enter the required information then click Finish gor Synch 5 Switch to the Team Synchronising perspective 6 Make sure that the plug in that you created in Step
301. nstructions for their successful use It may be comprised of estimation considerations and estimation metrics Practice Represents a proven way or strategy of doing work to achieve a goal that has a positive impact on the work product or process quality Practices are defined orthogonally to methods and processes They could summarise aspects that impact may different parts of a method or specific process Report A predefined template of a result that is generated on the basis of other work products as an output from some form of tool automation An example for a report would be a use case model survey that is generated by extracting diagram information from a graphical model and textual information from documents and combines these two types of information into a report Reusable Asset Provides a solution to a problem in a given context The asset may have a variability point which is a location in the asset that might have a value provided or customised by the asset consumer The asset has rules for usage that are the instructions describing how the asset should be used Roadmap Describes how a process is typically performed Processes can often be much easier understood by providing a walkthrough of a typical instance of the process In addition to making the process practitioner understand how the work in the process is being performed a roadmap provides additional information about how acti
302. nt 1 1 1 Content Packages Create TILI Roles Create TI12 Tasks Create 1 1 1 3 Work Products Create 1 1 1 4 Guidance Create 1 1 2 Standard Categories 1 1 2 1 Disciplines Create Dd WORX Domains Create T 1233 Work Product Kinds Create 1 1 2 4 Role Sets Create Dp Pte Tools Create 1 1 3 Custom Categories Create 1 2 Processes 1 2 1 Capability Patterns Create 1222 Delivery Processes Create 2 Method Configurations Create What you are creating will be nested under the parent folder of the type you are creating i e a role will be nested under the parent folder node Roles a Task under the parent folder node Tasks and so forth resulting in the following Library view mA Library gy o 8 My Plug in 5 Method Content m Content Packages A My Content Package 8 Roles e Tasks 3 Work Products Guidance Standard Categories 42 Disciplines 8 Domains a8 Work Product Kinds i A A A A F amp rs o fi E Forseenepeosa A amp Tools gt Custom Categories Processes gt a Capability Patterns gt fa Delivery Processes Gs Configurations 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 100 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer All method pl
303. nt gt xmi file name is changed The library xmi file is changed Name is the Name field for the element Changing this field changes the file name of the element Check in both changes as closely together as possible Delete a method content element task role work product guidance custom categories or standard category The method content xmi file is deleted The library xmi file is changed 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 257 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Action Impact Comments Create a new process capability pattern or delivery process The plugin xmi file is modified New directory and new model xmi and content xmi files are created for the new CP DP and added to version control The plugin xmi file is updated to include a reference to the new capability pattern or delivery process Be sure to place the new files under version control before checking in plugin xmi a Note It is advisable to double check that your new process is selected in your configuration If it is not you will not see it in the Configuration View Delete a process Capability pattern or delivery process a The plugin xmi file is modified a T
304. ntent selection section As you browse notice that the sub trees list all categories that are defined in the selected method plug ins When you select a category all elements in this category are added to the configuration regardless of whether the content packages where these elements are stored were selected in the list on the left In this way you can add elements to your configuration based on logical criteria For example you might want to add all of the Template guidance that was in a category called High Ceremony to your configuration regardless of which content packages these templates were stored in When you select a category in the right bottom box then all elements that were in the category are removed or subtracted from the configuration regardless if the content packages in which these elements are stored were selected in the list on the left or not This allows you to remove systematically content that was categorised with that category from your configuration 7 Save the method configuration m Close the editor and confirm you want to save m Click on one of the disk icons current or all in the toolbar Use the shortcut Cirl s m Click File gt Save 8 Navigation Views Define the views for the method configuration A view is a navigation tree browser in a published method configuration Every published configuration can have several views that are displayed as tree browsers in individual sliders The s
305. ntries Create Practice Guidance a Rich Text Editor Method Content Variability Copyright Notices m Method Content for Publishing 7 1 Create Method Content Elements Method Content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a process Processes take the method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customised to specific types of projects Library is ey O 3 8 My Plug in Method Content Content Packages amp My Content Package CS Roles s Tasks a 8 Work Products Guidance Standard Categories Custom Categories gt Processes ie Capability Patterns __ Delivery Processes Ua Configurations my_new_config Method content elements are Role contains roles 57 A role defines a set of related skills competencies and responsibilities of an individual or individuals 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 145 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Task contains tasks Work Product contains artefacts deliverables or outcomes Guidance contains checklist concept example guideline estimation considerations practice repo
306. nts categorises them and defines the relationships between them Processes are then constructed from these method elements by organising them into semi ordered sequences work breakdowns or workflows that are customised to specific types of projects Plug ins All content is organised in method plug ins A method plug in is a container for method content packages that contains both method and process content A method plug in can be standalone or can reference other plug ins When you create a method plug in you can reference other plug ins and reuse their content by modifying or extending the content or adding your own content Referencing other extensible method plug ins is one of the most powerful features provided by EPF Composer This mechanism allows extensive customisation of already generated content without directly changing the original base content You should always create new content in a method plug in that you produce This separates your content from the original content and allows you to update your own library with new releases of base content without affecting the content that you have created in your own plug ins The base method content included with EPF Composer is protected from direct modification Read only method plug ins are dimmed in the Library view indicating that they are locked 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 46 of 275 This program and the accompanying materi
307. o which this element will contribute The base element must be the same type of element as the contributing element 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 167 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Method Content Variability a Associations Impacted by Variability Browsing Variability Relationships Replaces Variability Extends Variability Extends and Replaces Variability 7 4 2 Extends Variability Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions Extends is not used to modify content of the base plug in but to provide the ability for the extending plug in to define its own content which is a variant of content already defined An example of this is a special version of a generic Review Record for a specific type of review The effect of this is that the base element and any number of extending elements can be used side by side but refer to each other through the extends relationship Extends also p
308. ocess documentation 1 Create your content from scratch 2 Use an existing content library and modify its content 3 Use an existing content library to add specific content to your own documentation Which one to choose depends on what amount of material you already have available and how much of content you expect to be reusable from the provided libraries Already created method content can be imported either by importing method libraries method plug ins or XML files All method contents are stored in a method library and importing already created content requires either an existing method library or the creation of a new library Importing a method library creates a new method library while importing a method plug in or an XML file requires an existing method library or the creation of a new method library before importing Existing method content import sources Library Configuration Method Plug ins XML By installing already created method elements and by changing and extending the content the authors can create process descriptions that are appropriate for their environment without having to start from scratch 2 2 EPF Download Site A library is a container for method plug ins and method configuration definitions All method elements are stored in a library To download existing content from the EPF site go back to the first download page as in previous Figure 1 here figure 7 EPF Downloads 8 Mar 10
309. ocess expresses the variances of work performed in the various disciplines method content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 28 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 21 EPF Method Framework Method Framework ppt f Process onten A C Task Descriptor B Work Product amp Role Descriptor i c id R vee ihram uidance i amp Role ag G escriptor ee 63 Activity sl is z Capability d Pattern Catego X iai N g Delivery _ Process ee The picture above provides a summary of the key elements used in the EPF Composer their relationships with processes or method content As you see method content is primarily expressed using work products roles tasks and guidance Categories are required for publishing the process methodologies as a Web site Guidance such as checklists examples or roadmaps can also be defined to provide exemplary walkthroughs of a process On the right hand side of the diagram you see the elements used to represent processes in EPF Composer The main process element is the activity that can be nested to define breakdown structures as well as related to each other to define a flow of work Activities also contain descriptors that reference method content Activities are used to
310. od Content Packages Create a Method Content Package Decomposition Some considerations about how to decompose your subject area into method plug ins may be helpful Decomposition splits the subject area into smaller areas Each sub area is addressed independently and the models of the sub areas are subsequently aggregated 37 All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 38 A method content package is a container for method elements Elements are organised in method packages to structure a large scale of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse 3 Method content is organised into content packages that are contained in method plug ins 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 134 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer to form a complete solution The decomposition composition imply a reference model for the larger subject area In addition to splitting the subject area itself it can be useful to create models of each sub area at multiple levels of abstraction creating a hierarchical reference model of the subject area Such an approach is very useful wh
311. od content element Role Guidance Section SEEE T tit it it it t Work product responsible for 134 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 135 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 136 A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 173 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Association direction Element
312. oecoreieserrasi siii ieten Cerese o No sE R Naio i REESE EUEN ESE Raa 31 3 4 Method Configurations Overview esssseriesssreesrsreesisriesrrsisstestestesesressenrinseseresrest 32 4 TUTORIALS 34 4 1 Explore the EPF Composer Workbench essesseseesesesesrsseesreerrsrrsresrresesrrssreriesresresreee 34 4 Tle COnCepts inon n E R R E E RE N E E 35 412 Basic Navicat on cerano o neira E a R E E R EER eset 37 4 1 3 Browse Method Content 00 0 0 ceeccecessceeseecseeceeneeceseeeseeeceaeeseaeecaeceeaeecaceseeeecaeeeeneecnaeeeeeeeeea 40 4 1 4 Browse Process Content 0 cceeccecescesnceecsseceseeeceseceeeeecsaeceeneecsaeceeeeecsaeceeneesaeceeeeecsaeceeneees 41 4 1 3 Browse While Authoring sserscenicsienscarnynsrose noso ia ai i e erit 43 AO Sear e r E E E Repneneceteneiboneess 43 4 2 Create Method Content cctet sicidecaesialecisiediivessdadves nann a e A 44 AyD Ns ACOnCEPtS eisrean E E E R N 46 4 2 2 Create a Method PIU GHi0 ses csiscdsscesscesesanchgncs casceeebnddeduesebteus ex E E ARE REEE EEEE ERRi 47 4 2 3 Create a Content Packages s2icisiccsscescsasceivocesceesnts cteadedescessepasdssobivccenteseotpacednesebhosecoadeedecbunseas 48 4 2 4 Create a Work Product ceeceesessseceeececseceeneeceacceeececsaceseneecsaeeeeaeecsaeesentecaeeseneecaeeseneeea 49 AD Dac Create a ROIG xaos ws ccret eek fers ve cehsecostcecseces cbnceesicesseeestasedeiccds cases EE EE E 31 A20 Create a Task neesii etea a eoeseateessnhis sess
313. ogically replaced with the new replacing element to which all incoming associations still point as before but which has potentially new attribute values and outgoing associations When you replace an element all description attributes are replaced by corresponding attribute values from the replacing element If a description attribute in the replacing element is blank but the base element has content the attribute will be blank in the resulting element Replace always replaces attributes and associations of the base element with the replacing element s attributes and associations except for incoming associations which are only added to the base but do not replace the base s incoming associations Replace association rules The following rules are for replacing associations All outgoing associations from the base element are replaced with associations of the replacing element If the replacing element does not define any then the resulting element will also not have any Incoming associations from the base element are added to the replacing element Attributes of the base element are replaced with attributes of the replacing element including the base element s identifier A base element of a replacement can have only one replacing element per configuration If more than one replacing element is present no replacement takes place Replacement is transitive If a replacing element is replaced itself the final replacer prevail
314. oles see Develop Team Allocation Structures Work Product Usage Define which work products should be created in activities and find tasks and roles from there For more information about work products see Develop Work Product Usage Structures Related topics Method Plug in w Capability Pattern Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Extend Capability Patterns Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures 166 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 167 A work breakdown structure is a hierarchical breakdown of work such as activities tasks and steps defining a process 168 Tn the Team Allocation view you can create a process by defining which roles participate in activities and find responsible work products and tasks from there You can also review the roles in a process that has been created by adding tasks or work products to the process 16 Tn the Work Product Usage view you can create a process by defining which work products will be created and used in the process and then finding responsible roles and tasks from there You can also review the work products in a process
315. ome simple browsing actions This is the first in a series of tutorials about EPF Composer Basic Navigation The goal of this exercise is to switch between perspectives and see the features they provide Browse Method Content The goal of this exercise is to examine method content in a library using the Browsing perspective 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 34 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Browse Process Content The goal of this exercise is to explore process content in a library using the Browsing perspective Browse while Authoring The goal of this exercise is to browse some library content while in the Authoring perspective Search The goal of this exercise is to use the search function to locate method content 4 1 1 Concepts If you are a new user of EPF Composer then this tutorial is an appropriate starting point You will explore the basic user interface features and experiment with some simple browsing actions This is the first in a series of tutorials about EPF Composer Method Library The Method Library contains Method Plug ins and Method Configurations Method Plug ins A method library is analogous to a warehouse full of parts that are used to assemble various products Elements in a
316. on name The presentation name is the name that is in your published content and in the Configuration View You can also make this name appear in the Library View by toggling the Show Presentation Names button in the Library view toolbar In the Brief Description field type a short description of the new role In the Main Description field type a more detailed description of the new role The main description is a more detailed version of the description you typed into the Brief Description field There are three ways you can create text for the description Directly by typing it manually in the editor Copy from another similar role and then modify by using the editor Copy from an HTML source such as a published Web site Tip You can use the Rich Text Editor to edit or enter the text for any field that has the Rich Text Editor icon el Click the icon to access the Rich Text Editor Click the icon again to close the Rich Text Editor For more information about the editor see Rich Text Editor Under Version Information provide any pertinent version information about the role Click the Work Products tab and click Add to the right of the Responsible for field Select one or more work products from the list A description of the work product that you select is in the Brief Description field at the bottom of the window Tip A work product is displayed if it is the output of a task which the role performs The list of work
317. only contain tasks for example Table 9 The five standard categories Method Standard Content Categories D amp scrption A discipline is a collection of tasks that are related to a major area of concern within the overall IT environment a For example on a software development project it is common Tasks Disciplines to perform certain requirements tasks in close coordination with analysis and design tasks Separating these tasks into different disciplines makes the tasks easier to understand You can organise disciplines by using discipline groupings Work Products Domains A domain is a logical hierarchy of related work products that are grouped together based on timing resources or 152 Method content and process elements are organised into logical categories The categories can appear in your final published Web site as navigation views There are two types of categories standard and custom 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 185 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Method Standard Content Categories Description relationship A domain categorises many work products but a work product can only belong to one domain You can divide domains into sub domains A work
318. ons Task A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a specific role The duration of a task is generally a few hours to a few days Tasks usually generate one or more work products Template A template is a specific type of guidance that provides a work product with a predefined table of contents sections packages and headings Templates provide a standardised format as well as descriptions of how the sections and packages are supposed to be used and completed Templates can be provided for documents as well as conceptual models or physical data stores 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 273 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Term definition Term definitions define specific terms concepts or other ideas relevant to method and process content A term definition is not directly related to any content elements but relationships are derived when the term is used in the description text in a content element Tool mentor A tool mentor is a type of guidance that shows how to use a specific software application to accomplish a piece of work White paper A white paper is a special type of guidance which includes reports and recommendations White papers can be read and understood as independent documents in
319. ontent and processes for a specific context such as a specific variant of the OpenUp framework that you want to publish and deploy for a given software project or as a foundation for a development organisation All content and processes are organised in method plug ins and method content packages A method configuration is simply a selection of the method plug ins and packages Figure 24 EPF Composer Configuration Editor 2 my basic configuration 3 Configuration my basic configuration Configuration Content Select the method plug ins content packages and processes that will be included in this configuration Re calculate errors whenever configuration is changed Configuration problem view options Hide errors ORe calculate errors only when Refresh button is clicked and when saving Oli C Hide warnings C Hide infos Content A Add these Categories E a m amp e a E core E practice amp practice 88 process amp publish E amp publish gt i my_plug in v lt gt Description Plug in and Package Selection views You create and specify a configuration using the configuration editor depicted in the figure above You could start creating your own method configuration by copying one of the configurations included with EPF Composer and modify it to fit your specific needs You can add or remove whole method plug ins as well as select each plug in by checking or u
320. opics Process Authoring Overview Process Authoring Overview Method Configurations Overview Create Capability Patterns Create Delivery Processes Working with Process Diagrams Working with Activity Diagrams Working with Activity Detail Diagrams Working with Work Product Dependency Diagrams Publish Diagrams 213 14 9 10 1 Working with Activity Diagrams Activity diagrams show the workflow of child process elements of a process activity phase or iteration The diagrams show the subordinate activities as part of a higher level activity and the sequence relationships between those activities The diagram can also be used to show the sequence of tasks for an activity that consists of a set of tasks When you create the diagram the sequence of activities or control flow depicted in your diagram is reflected in the precedence for these activities in your work breakdown structure You can create activity diagrams internally by using the EPF Composer diagram editor or you can choose to include diagrams created externally by another application To create activity diagrams 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Capability Patterns or Delivery Processes node and select the process that contains the activity that the diagram will model 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and
321. or the activity Use the tabs on the side of the Properties view to review different aspects of the task descriptor In the Properties view you can perform individual modifications of the task descriptor such as change the presentation name add textual descriptions and change performing roles among others When changing the task descriptor s relationships under the Roles or Work Products tabs you can add new elements from your method content by clicking 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 202 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Add or connect your task descriptor with tasks already present in this activity For more information see Process Element Properties View 7 Continue adding tasks to the activity or activities You can preview what your process will look like in a published Web site at any time by switching to the Browsing Perspective and then selecting the process or an activity in the process in the Configuration View You can use the links on the page to navigate through the process Switch back to the Authoring Perspective to continue editing your process Related topics Process Management Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Create Delivery Processes Develop Team Allocation Struc
322. ording to any scheme Custom categories can be used to compose publishable views thereby providing a means to organise method content for publishing A View Navigation View is a custom category that is designed for publication Required packages and content elements are assigned to a custom category The custom category can then be added as a view to a configuration 4 5 2 Publish a Method Configuration The goal of this exercise is to publish the method configuration that we created in an earlier exercise To publish a method configuration 1 Switch to the Authoring perspective if you are not already using it 2 Select the configuration my basic configuration if it is not already selected using the configuration selection menu in the main tool bar 3 In the Library view panel expand the Configurations folder and double click my basic contiguration The configuration editor opens in the right panel showing the Description tab 4 Click on the Plug in and Package Selection tab The tab shows the method plug ins and their content packages that have been included in the configuration Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer Training Libraries epf_practice_training iin x Me ett Search Configuestion Window tdp my best configenstion vl e OP amp E mw thode 7 a Library f my beri conligaration lt Ware Configuration my basic configuration mett_mont T practice Configeratios Content amp
323. other method content elements as mandatory input or output It is an architectural issue with considerations like semantic consistency coherence and coupling being central considerations Multiple Content Packages Library a aS lt pi_my_first_plug_ in Ba Method Content 4 Content Packages Ba First Content Package 5 Roles Tasks de Work Products Guidance mi Second Content Package 25 Roles Tasks oe Work Products amp Guidance S Standard Categories Custom Categories lg Processes Ge Configurations 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 109 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Create a Content Package Create a Method Plug in Create Method Content GWA Method Content Variability Method content variability allows method content elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional If an element supports variability the specification is shown at the bottom of the element s Description view You can use variability to customise configurations that use method
324. owing Browse existing process content Create a delivery process Create a process diagram Time required The estimated time to complete this tutorial is about 2 hours Prerequisites Reuse method content tutorial 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved gt Page 79 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Lessons in this module Concepts This topic provides basic background information needed to complete this tutorial Browse Process Content The goal of this exercise is to gain a basic understanding of processes Create a Delivery Process The goal of this exercise is to create a delivery process using core method content directly Use Capability Patterns The goal of this exercise is to create a new delivery process using capability patterns Create a Process Diagram The goal of this exercise is to use diagram features 4 4 1 Concepts This topic provides basic background information needed to complete this tutorial Using process authoring a Process Engineer can incorporate method elements into process structures for example a work breakdown structure format familiar to Project Managers The processes can be included in a configuration to be published as part of the published Web site and can be exported
325. phase and activity are three types of activity and a process is a sequence of these activities and the copying capability pattern procedure can be used to copy any activity not only capability patterns Copy creates a Not Applicable variability relationship type to the original activity 201 A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 209 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To copy a capability pattern 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Delivery Processes or the Capability Pattern folder node and select the process that will be linked to other activities through a variability relationship 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Select your process authoring view by clicking the Work Breakdown Struct
326. phase under the activity Define the System and secondly in the elaboration phase in the activity Refine the system definition You see below each of these task applications referred to as a task descriptors lists of the performing roles as well as the input and output work products If you look closely you see that these lists are different for each of these two task descriptors expressing differences in performing the Detail a Use Case method throughout the lifecycle You see different roles involved and changes in the list of inputs to be considered and outputs to be produced or updated These changes were defined by the author that created this process to express the exact focus of the task performance for each occurrence In addition to updating the roles input and output work products for a task descriptor you can also provide additional textual descriptions as well as define the exact steps of the task that should and should not be performed for this particular occurrence of the task EPF Composer provides you with a process editor that supports different breakdown structure views as well as graphical process presentations As a process author you typically start by creating an activity breakdown dividing and breaking your process down into phases iterations and high level activities Instead of creating your activities in the breakdown structure editor you can alternatively work in a graphical activity diagram editor that allows
327. product can have many work product kinds For Work instance you might want to have a series of work product Product kinds that correspond to the overall intent of work products Kinds such as specification plan or model Roles Role Sets A role set is used to group roles with certain commonalities For example you can set up a role set named Analyst to group together roles such as Business Process Analyst System Analyst and Requirements Specifier Each of these roles work with similar techniques and have overlapping skills but might be responsible for performing certain tasks and creating certain work products a Role sets can be organised by using role set groupings The tools type is a container for tool mentors A tool mentor Tool is a type of guidance that shows how to use a specific software Mentor Tools application to accomplish a piece of work Guidance Tools can also provide general descriptions of a tool and its general capabilities Standard categories provide a means to categorise content according to best practices for creating structured methods To use a standard method category in a navigation view You will rarely if ever use a standard category as the top level navigation view since a standard category only contains one type of method content Standard categories can however be used as part of a navigation view based upon a custom category 1 In the Library view of
328. products in the Work products that are output of tasks that this role performs is computed and cannot be changed with the role editor Click OK The window closes and the Responsible for field is populated Remember Selected elements in an Add Remove section display both the element name plug in name and the path package name to that element Click the Guidance tab Use this part of the editor to add and remove guidance elements for the role To add guidance click Add select the guidance you want to add and click OK To remove guidance select it in the Guidance field and click Remove When you select a guidance element the brief description of the guidance is displayed The Configuration View displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views The Library view displays the method content that is available in the current method library which is organized into sets of method plug ins and configurations The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements
329. program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 2 The new term is named new_term_definition by default Replace this text with the correct name of the term that you are adding and enter the definition of this term in Main description Edit Glossary Entries To edit a glossary entry 1 Right click an existing term definition element 2 and click Edit Double clicking the icon for an element is a quicker way to launch the appropriate editor for that type of element 2 You can make changes to the term definition or attach additional guidance To save your changes and exit click File gt Save or close the guidance editor window Delete Glossary Entries Remember Glossary entries must be deleted from the Library view They cannot be deleted from the Configuration view To delete a glossary entry 1 Right click an existing term definition element and click Delete The Confirm Deletion window opens 2 Confirm your choice by clicking OK Related topics Guidance Elements Create Guidance Elements 7 2 4 Guidance Relationships Guidance is useful supplemental content of various types that can be attached to the following method elements Roles Tasks and Work products The following table shows all possible relationships between work products tasks and roles and the variou
330. ps Review the requirements to be tested Identify relevant Test Cases Outline the Test Cases Contributing Step 1 Identify test data needs Share and evaluate the Test Cases Contributing Step 2 Back to top ral 11 You can also try specifying additional artefacts guidance and additional performer roles in the contributing task using the Authoring perspective and then view the result in the Configuration view to see the behaviour 4 3 5 Extend a Role The goal of this exercise is to extend base method content associated with a role by using Extends variability Extends variability works differently than contributes variability in that the method content element that extends the base method element inherits the attributes of the extended base element To extend a role 1 Switch back to the Authoring perspective 2 Create a new content package under my_p ug in Name the new content package extends_test Close the editor panel and save your changes 3 Create a new role under the extends_test content package 4 Use these attributes for the new role Name my_extends_developer Presentation name Extends OpenUP Developer Brief description My extended role brief description 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved gt Page 72 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution
331. pying an existing configuration Configurations can be created by selecting plug ins and packages and then adding or subtracting specific elements in content categories This provides a way to remove whole groups of elements such as all work products in a specific domain or all tasks in a specific discipline Configurations will be specified in the following four step procedure 1 Select the plug ins to be considered for the configuration definition All additional selections in the following Steps 2 to 4 must be included in these plug ins If categories selected in Steps 3 and 4 are comprised of elements that are defined both inside the selected plug ins and of elements that are defined in other plug ins then configurations will only consider the elements that are within the selected plug ins 2 Select method content packages to be included in the configuration definition As a refinement to the method plug in selection the specific method packages determine which packages should be included into the interpretation of the configuration For a selected package every element directly residing inside that package shall be interpreted as part of the configuration 3 Select content categories to be added to the configuration definition As an additional refinement to the category definition created with Steps 1 and 2 you can select custom or standard categories whose elements shall be interpreted as part of the configuration Step 2 re
332. quired that all elements that are physically 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 115 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer stored within the same package are part of the configuration this steps allows adding individual elements of a category to a configuration 4 Select content categories to be subtracted from the configuration definition As an additional refinement to the category definition created with Steps 1 to 3 you can select custom or standard categories whose elements will not be part of the configuration In other words you can subtract whole sets of individual elements from a configuration by assigning them a given category and listing the category in this step Advantages of this approach include Increased flexibility in selecting complete packages Ability to remove individual elements from a configuration Ability to remove whole categories from a configuration in a single operation Related topics Method Library Configuration View Create a Method Configuration 5 10 Process Management 5 10 1 Process Description A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done and defines the sequences of tasks performed by roles and the work products produced over time In method authoring the
333. r 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 132 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer A Eclipse Process Framework Composer O ep compaserept_work_training he Gt Sek oka mian a e pwk stare as B x gabe iy midang eT Dalt L Te eon T Method Piag n m_m fint plug in creme Wiewetion Paidi pera nitaka oboe tite ratte pag fore Ae Bt ple Davey tien 11 12 13 14 15 16 The method plug in editor contains already the information you entered in New Method Plug in wizard You can then enter additional information the name of most of the fields are self explanatory such as version information copyright field and an additional brief description field for the referenced plug ins There is a Supporting plug in tick box for restricting the plug in to be a support plug in A supporting method plug in provides reusable content for other method plug ins The content that is stored in a supporting method plug in is only visible and published for a method configuration if other method content references it and if these are not supporting plug ins themselves The method plug in can be locked to prevent further changes to the content by selecting the Lock plug in box When you create a new method plug
334. r 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 135 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer subject area A logical package can therefore contain other logical packages Every hierarchical level down to but not including the method plug ins is handled as logical packages The logical packages are created simply by using dots in the method plug in names The six Method Plug ins in the example are listed in the Hierarchical presentation according to the naming structure created with the dots in the name When using the Flat presentation the highest level library content unit is the Method Plug in and the same six method plug ins will be displayed as Library sh ae a teamA core teamA domainxX WP1 a teamA domainxX WP 0 teamB core teamB tools TA 4 teamB tools TB 42 Configurations X To switch between Flat and Hierarchical presentations click the down arrow w in the Library tool bar and select Method Plug in Presentation then choose Flat or Hierarchical vop amp Show Presentation Names Link with Editor Method Plug in Presentation gt i Flat gg t Hierarchical With method plug ins you can organise your content at a level of granularity and according to your reference model that meet
335. r 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 247 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 5 Switch to the CVS Repository Exploring perspective Eas This perspective shows files on the CVS server 6 Right click anywhere in the blank area of the CVS repository view Select New gt Repository location 7 Enter settings supplied by the CVS system administrator These settings should include the following Host Repository path User Password Connection type Now the view can be populated Related topics Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to cys Bookmark not defined Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 2 Create a New View with CVS To create a new view with CVS Ba CVS Reposito 1 Switch to the CVS Repository Exploring perspective FERE 2 Go to the HEAD or Branch 3 To check out a library right click it and select Check out By default the library is checked out in the application workspace Related topics Install and Configure CVS Add New Libraries to CVS 39 You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allo
336. r and select New gt Role 4 Use the following attributes for this new role Name my_contributing_architect Presentation name My Contributing Architect Do not close the editor window yet because we have not finished defining this role 5 Scroll down the window to the Content Variability section use the Variability type menu and select Contributes 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 66 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 Click Select to the right of Base in the Content Variability section the Select Dialog Roles window opens Choose the base role architect You will find this in the core default role_def base plug in Method Element Type ar Select Dialog Roles Roles x Name patterns matching names will be shown Patterns are separated by comma where any string any character core default role_def base S S basic_roles i 5 4 practice tech evolutionary_arch assign BA role_assignments a architect ra Contributes to architect in core default role_def base Brief Description This role is responsible for defining the software architecture which includes making the key technical decisions that constrain the overall design and implementation of
337. rary view Related topics Method Library Authoring Perspective Browsing Perspective Method Configurations 6 6 View Method Content You can browse method content in both the Authoring Perspective and Browsing Perspective While authoring method content you can see a preview of the published page for the content hat you are editing by clicking the Preview tab at the bottom of the Content Editor Click any link in a displayed page to go to that page Use the buttons in the editor toolbar to perform familiar browser actions such as Back or Refresh While browsing method content in the Browsing perspective you can see a preview of 30 A method library is a container for method plug ins and method configuration definitions All method elements are stored in a method library 31 A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and method packages in a method library 32 A method library is a container for method plug ins and method configuration definitions All method elements are stored in a method library 33 A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and method packages in a method library 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 126 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer any method and process conten
338. ration Tteration 1 n 19 extends slab Iteration a Litecyde Architecture Milestone 48 19 Milestone i a Construction Phase 49 48 18 Phase 4 SS Construction Iteration 1 n 50 extends rons Tteration x amp Initial Operational Capability Milestone 71 50 Milestone a Transition Phase 72 71 49 Phase a Transition Iteration 1 n 73 extends trans Tteration _ E Plan and Manage Iteration Fa evtende nia Acthdhy 4 Alan Iteration New Sibling r 1S Manage Heration Local Contribution X Assess Results Local Replacement BA Develop Solution Increment Local Replacement and Deep Copy jl s Test Solution lt Suppress z E Ongoing Tasks PEA Reese Suppress Tasks Product Release Milestone Update Suppression from Base 2 To replace the extended activity right click the top level of the extended activity and click Local Replacement The tasks in the activity that is being replaced are deleted from the local target delivery process without affecting the original capability pattern 3 You can now add new Child elements to the activity in your delivery process in replacement of those that have been removed Related topics Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Local Contribution Local Replacement and Deep Copy 9 7 3 3 Local Replacement and Deep Copy You cannot modif
339. ration view panel should look like this 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 40 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 8 Configuration 3 amp gt E publish openup Disciplines m Architecture D Outline the Architecture Development OpenUP Disciplines Project Management Requirements Test B Uncategorized Tasks Domains Work Product Kinds CS Role Sets C Tools iS Processes aa Custom Categories es Guidance AAE ee Ee Click the Refine the Architecture task A preview of the published Web page for the selected element is displayed in the content panel On the published Web page click the link under Primary Performer in the Relationships section This will show the preview page for the Architect You can click on any links in the preview and use the back icon in the preview toolbar to return to previous pages Use this technique to view other elements in the Configuration view Explore elements under Domains Role Sets etc 4 1 4 Browse Process Content The goal of this exercise is to explore process content in a library using the Browsing perspective To browse process content in the browsing perspective 1 Switch to the Browsing perspective 2 To view a Capability Pattern in the Configuration
340. rations as Web Sites 10 4 Import a Library Configuration To import a library configuration 1 Click File to select Import The Import wizard opens 2 Select Library Configuration Click Next to continue 3 Specify the directory containing the library configuration to import Use Browse to navigate to the file 4 Review the changes that will be made to the current method library Click Finish 5 Specify the location of your backup file The backup is a copy of your library before the merge takes place You have the option to Skip the backup 6 A window indicates when the import is complete You will have the option to inspect the error log Click OK Related topics Export a Library Configuration Export XML Export to Microsoft Project 10 5 Export a Method Plug in Method plug ins can be exported This provides a convenient way to distribute method content to other users To export a method plug in 1 Click File and click t Export Select Method Plug ins and click Next Select the method plug ins to export and click Next Select each method plug in to review its dependencies and click Next In the next page confirm the export and click Next oa fF WO NY Enter a location for the exported method plug in You can use Browse to navigate to the location for the exported folder 7 Click Finish to begin the export process 39 You can use the Publish Method Configuration wizard to ge
341. reate Delivery Processes Working with Process Diagrams Working with Activity Diagrams Working with Work Product Dependency Diagrams Publish Diagrams 20 9 10 3 Working with Work Product Dependency Diagrams A Work Product Dependency Diagram illustrates the dependencies of a work product on other work products The diagrams show how one or more work products are used in the creation of another work product within a particular activity in a process and provide traceability of the work products 720 You can create process diagrams to illustrate the relationships between processes When you publish a method Web site you can choose whether or not to include these diagrams 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 229 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer The diagrams must be created manually Relationships depicted in these diagrams are not reflected elsewhere in your process To create work product dependency diagrams 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Capability Patterns or Delivery Processes node and select the process that contains the 221 activity that the diagram will illustrate 3 Open the process editor by double
342. reate a guidance element 1 2 3 Expand the Content Package in which you want to create your guidance Right click Guidance and select New then select a guidance type from the menu The following guidance types have the same editor including a Description tab a Guidance tab and a Preview tab Concept Example Guideline Estimating Considerations Report Reusable Asset Roadmap Supporting Material Template Term Definition Tool Mentor and Whitepaper Not in the list Checklist Example and Practice Use the fields in the editor to specify the guidance details Start by assigning a unique name to the guidance element along with a presentation name that is used as the external visible name when other elements refer to this element or when the element is published Every guidance type has specific content fields in the content editor that are distributed over two or more stacked tabs Use the content fields to describe your guidance type Use the Rich Text Editor to edit or enter the text for any field that has the Rich Text Editor icon 2 Click the symbol to access the Rich Text Editor Click the symbol again to close the Rich Text Editor In the Icon section select a Node icon to be displayed with the guidance in the Library View and Configuration View and in the tree browser in a published Web site The node icon should be 16 x 16 pixels You can also select a shape icon to be displayed at the top of the publish
343. reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 264 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Setting Description capability pattern to a process this option decides if the applied pattern should have the same elements suppressed as the original pattern or if all element suppressions should be removed Elements can be suppressed via the Properties view and through the context menu operations Use this page to specify the default values for some of the attributes of process elements created in the Process editor The following attributes are available for selection for Phase Iteration Activity and Milestone Optional off be default Multiple Occurrences off by default Planned on by default Event Driven off by default Method gt Authoring Ongoing off by default gt Process Editor gt Preakcovmisementy Ropeatable off by default Attributes l The following attributes are available for selection for Role Task and Work Product Descriptors Optional off be default m Multiple Occu
344. review the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 157 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer If the type of guidance is a Practice you can add references to other elements in the References tab If the guidance is a Template you can attach multiple files or URLs to the guidance in the Description tab Related topics Guidance Elements Create Method Content Create a Role Create a Task Create a Work Product 7 2 2 Practices A practice is a documented approach to solving one or several commonly occurring problems a proven way to achieve a goal A practice is published with a predefined tree structure of elements that realise or relate to the practice This allows practices to be displayed with a standard look and feel in the navigation views of the published site Practice navigation view A practice guidance element P is published with the following ordered structure and hierarchy fe 1 List of all Roadmap guidance elements associated to the practice Folder labelled Key Concepts with all associated concept guidance elements Folder with all Work Product elements associated to the practice 2 3 4 Folder with all Task elements associated 5 Folder
345. riability vccsas cane 0s colccstsezssusieescesuecoasesnes A E ETE E 170 7 4 4 Extends and Replaces Variability 00 0 0 ceeceesecsseceececeeeceeneeceaeceeeeesaeeeeneeceaeeeseneeseaeeeeneees 171 7 4 5 Associations Impacted by Variability 0 cece cess ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaecaecsaeseeeeeeetenseas 173 7 4 6 Browsing Variability Relationships 20 0 0 eee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaecaecaecaeeeaeeeaeeees 176 TD Copy sit NOUCES eissor Sec evesectesssactasgsolacingstovesessstersassddiesyestsesirssaopessssbacessts Agsezes 178 Tails Create Copyright Notice seisen ee E EE E ote eos asi e dasa 178 7 5 2 Change Default Copyright Notice cece ec ceseceecseecseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseessecsaecaecaecsaeeaeeeneeeas 179 7 5 3 Override Default Copyright Notice eee eee csc csecseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeesecaecaecsaecsaesaeeeaeeeas 179 7 6 Method Content for Publishing eee eee eeeceseeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeceaeeeseesseeeeeeesaeeseeeees 180 TOL Create Index Entries enion Gas eH Bieler ea is 180 7 6 2 Change Feedback Addresses c cc scccccescsciicstessss n en n e EEEE E EE EEEE 183 8 CATEGORISING METHOD CONTENT 185 Bilis Nayisation Views enrenninipiror o ee aa n EE anes EEEE E S 185 8 2 Standard Method Categories isseire eirias iniii 185 63 C stom Cate Pores yc ccscerseacocdsssosadesvitcaressnaveiiqsausine epubanUesesbecusesaatedaaseaswsiuyestslengaboursooe 187 83 1 Create Custom Categories irri e ss ude A ER E Ei 188 8 3 2 Modify Custom Categories
346. ribution By now you should start to see the general pattern with this variability mechanism Recall that contributions append text in appropriate fields from one content package to another To contribute to a task 1 2 3 Switch back to the Authoring perspective Create a new task in the contribution_test content package Use the following attributes for this task Name my_contributing_task Presentation Name My Contributing Task Brief description Contributing Brief Description text Purpose Contributing Purpose text Main Description Contributing Main Description text Click the Steps tab and add two new steps named Contributing Step 1 and Contributing Step 2 Click the Description tab In the Content Variability section select Contributes as Variability type Click Select to the right of Base in the Content Variability section The Select Dialog Tasks window opens Select create_test_cases and click OK This will be the base element for our contribution Go back to the Steps tab and click Order Use the Up and Down buttons to reorder the steps Note that you can now insert your new steps into the original sequence of steps inherited from the base This is a good example of the power of variability contributions 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 70 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclip
347. riptor is similar to the corresponding method element editor but it also has information related to the element in the process The process information is also displayed in the corresponding row in the process display 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 216 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer y Properties Task Descriptor plan_iteration General Information General lt er toge genera information sour tes task descriptor Dea Provide g linfoma his task de Giidi Name plan_ferstion Roes Presentation name Mar Reralion Work Products Options Multipfe Occurrences F Pamed DEvent Orven Ongoing T Repesstztie Jeps 2 Index Presentatinn Nemo Depende Ack Depesidenicy 2 Syechroninad with source Method task Unk Method Element Clear General tab The Name and Presentation name default to the corresponding names in the base method element These names can be changed in a descriptor The following attributes are used to specify certain aspects of the element in the process and can be set for all types of process elements Optional If this is checked true the element is considered optional in the process This means that it is safe to remove the element If this is not checked false the element is con
348. rm you want to save Click on one of the disk icons current or all in the toolbar Use the shortcut Ctrl s Click File gt Save Remember When you create a new element or modify an existing element a symbol is displayed in the tab next to the name of the element indicating that the element needs to be saved Important The tool creates nodes for Task Role Work Product and Guidance under the new content package Related topics Method Plug in Create a Method Plug in Method Content Packages Method Content Elements Create Method Content Elements Guidance Elements Guidance elements is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most method elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 138 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 11 Create a Method Configuration A method configuration defines a logical subset of a method library You use method configurations to define the scope of your authoring work and when publishing or exporting content When you create a process you must specify at least one method configuration against which this process is authored See Method Configurations Overview for more details When ac
349. rn Type a name pattern in the field to match both element names and presentation names Scope In the Scope section you can restrict your search to a subset of element types Define your subset of element types that the search should look for by selecting the boxes that correspond to the types that you want to include in your search 3 Click Search The Search view opens with your search results 4 Inthe Search view you can double click an element to open its respective editor If you have Link with Editor selected in the Library view it displays where the selected element is in the library Related topics Method Content Elements 56 Method content provides step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independent of the placement of these steps within a development lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customised to specific types of projects 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 144 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 Create Method Content Contents Create Method Content Elements Create a Role Create a Task m Create a Work Product Create Guidance Elements Guidance Relationships Glossary E
350. rocess Analyst System Analyst and Requirements Specifier Each of these roles Roles Role Sets 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 113 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Method Standard Content _ Categories D amp SerPtion work with similar techniques and have overlapping skills but might be responsible for performing certain tasks and creating certain work products a Role sets can be organised by using role set groupings The tools type is a container for tool mentors A tool mentor Tool is a type of guidance that shows how to use a specific software Mentor Tools application to accomplish a piece of work Guidance Tools can also provide general descriptions of a tool and its general capabilities Custom Categories You can categorise content according to any scheme using custom categories Custom categories are used to compose Navigation Views thereby providing a means to organise method content for publishing A Navigation View is a custom category that is designed for publication Required content packages and content elements are assigned to a custom category The custom category can then be added as a view to a method configuration showing the required content packages and con
351. roducts EPF Composer supports the addition of guidance elements Guidance elements are supplementary free form documentation such as documented related to specific practices white papers concept descriptions guidelines templates examples and so on Guidance is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most Method and Process elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements Guidance elements can be attached to the following method content elements m Work products Tasks Roles Guidance elements can be attached to the standard method content categories Disciplines Domains 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 105 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Work Product Kinds Role Sets Tools Guidance elements can be attached to the following process elements Processes Capability Patterns and Delivery Processes Activity Descriptors Iterations Phases and Activities Task Descriptors Since the guidance elements can applied to either method or process elements they straddle both sides of the equation aligning method content with their use in processes The list of the fourteen types of guidance elements Library x Ai oO gt pi_my_new_plug_in BA
352. rogram and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Variability Type Association Description element are ignored In Relationships from the base are added to the replacer Text in the replacer is left untouched and the base element s text is ignored An extending element inherits characteristics of the base element Both the extender and the base element appear in the published Web site Out relationships from the base are added to the extender In relationships in the extender are left untouched the base element s are ignored Text is added Extend from the base if the extender has no value defined for the given section Xtends Provides a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions a This variability relationship combines the effects of extends and replace variability into one variability type Whereas the replaces variability completely replaces all attributes and Extends and outgoing association instances of the base variability element with new Replaces values and instances or removes all va
353. roperties View 19 A process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process A process can reuse method elements and combines them into a structure and sequence for carrying out work 209 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 208 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 9 7 Capability Patterns Reuse Capability patterns are a special type of process that describes a reusable cluster of activities in common process areas A capability pattern is applied against processes and the three activity types iteration phase and activity either through copying or extending already existing capability patterns With the mechanism of capability patterns it is not necessary to develop a process from scratch adding descriptors one by one You can use existing capability patt
354. rovides the key mechanism for binding capability patterns to processes A pattern is applied by defining an Extends relationship from an activity of the applying processes to the capability pattern The activity inherits association instances from the pattern and the pattern seems to be part of the resulting process after publication or by using the Browsing perspective Relevant information in the extending element is added to the base element in creating an additional element Text fields in the extending element are appended at the end of the respective text fields in the base element Extends only defines inheritance for the extending element The base element remains untouched If the extending element is allowed an association to only one other element and has such an element defined already inheritance will not override this existing association Extends association rules Outgoing associations from the base element are inherited by the extending element 18 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 19 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements 120 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base elem
355. rrences off by default Planned off by default Event Driven off by default Ongoing off by default Repeatable off by default Use this page the set the following preferences Default path Set the default path for publishing Web sites Feedback URL Set the default URL for Feedback that Method gt should be used for a new method configuration Publishing Browsing Include method content in descriptor pages This option defines how the browsing perspective presents descriptor pages default is false See Publishing Configurations as Web Sites Bookmark not defined for details Use this page to set the preferences for the following activity diagrams and activity detail diagrams Method gt Publishing Browsing gt Activity Diagrams m Publish activity diagrams for unmodified activity extensions off by default Publish activity detail diagrams that have not been created in process editor off by default 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 265 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Setting Description Number of tasks per row default is 10 See Publishing Configurations as Web Sites for details Method gt Publishing Browsing gt Role Diagram The param
356. rt reusable asset roadmap supporting material template term definition tool mentor and whitepaper To create a method content element 1 In the Library view expand the Content Package in which you want to create a new method content element 2 Right click the folder containing the type of method content element you want to create and select New then select the element that you want to create from the sub menu The new element is created and its respective editor opens Note The element you are creating will be nested under the parent folder of the type of method content you are creating i e a role will be nested under the parent folder Roles a Task under the parent folder Tasks and so forth Related Topics Method Content Elements Create a Role Create a Task Create a Work Product Guidance Elements Create Guidance Elements Method Content Variability Tela Create a Role A role defines a set of related skills competencies and responsibilities of an individual or individuals To create a role 1 Expand the Content Package in which you want to create the role 2 Right click Roles and select New gt Role The role editor opens with the Description tab set as the default 58 A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a specific role The granularity of a task is generally a few hours to a few days and usually affects one or a small number of work products 5 A work produ
357. ructure and click New Child gt Activity to create a new activity If needed create more activities to set up your breakdown structure Activities in addition to phases and iterations can be nested inside each other according to how each relates in the hierarchy You can add roles directly to your activities 3 Inthe Configuration view review the list of roles In this view tasks are sorted by role sets 4 Drill into the role sets hierarchy to see which roles are available in this configuration 5 Select a role and drag it on top of the appropriate activity The role is added as a role descriptor If the role is responsible for work products in the configuration s method content a wizard prompts you to add work products 6 Select one or more work products and click OK For each selected work product the next wizard prompts you to select tasks that produce these work products Again select one or more tasks and then click OK to add these elements to your process 7 Review the role descriptor s details in its Properties view If the Properties view is not displayed in the work breakdown structure editor right click the role and then select Show Properties View Use the tabs on the side of the Properties view to review different aspects of the role descriptor In the Properties view you can also perform individual modifications of the role descriptor such as change the presentation name add textual descriptions change work
358. ry process ii Presentation Name Model Info Entr Exit Deliverable my_firs_delivery_process my_first_iteration contributes to My New Capability Patten My Plug in amp my_first_phase New Sling Add from Method Content Apply Pattern Default Synchronization froen Method Contest Custom Synchronization Suppress Update Suppression from Base S Quident Rall Up Diagrams j tS Open Activity Diagram _ Expand All TO Description Work Breakdown Sru Collapse All E Open Work Product Dependency Diagram E Properties lt Preferences Publishing Optioeis amp Activity my_first activity User Defined Dragrams General zon D katian Pravi Guidance Name Work Rollup Preset ae Team Rallup Oop Manned i epo MEn Refresh Repeatasle Work Product Rollup Show Properties View 6 The activity diagram editor opens 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 221 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Pics Megs tee 125 fe My DP 2 Activity Requirements My DP ar Palette f Select LO Zoom Develop Technical Vision fet Note LS Hows Z Control Flow i gt Nodes ES Activity Partilion Start Node Identify and Oullins Requirements End Node l Fork Node _ a 21 Join Node E eeki gor Egga D
359. ry Processes 2 Method Configurations A method library is a repository of method elements used to generate process guidance based on a selected methodology Process guidance is typically delivered in the form of a published Web site but can also be imported into other compatible applications Method Configurations A method configuration is the manifest of method plug ins used to generate a specific instance of process guidance The term configuration is also used to refer to the process guidance that is generated by the manifest Method configurations are built from subsets of elements in the method library To follow our analogy method configurations represent the various products such as cars that can be assembled from parts in the warehouse While most cars require unique parts that are used by a specific model but the warehouse has large numbers of parts that can be used in more than one model Library and Configuration Views The Library View shows all of the parts in the warehouse including those that are used by all products and those that are used by specific products There might be parts that are not used in any of the products such as obsolete or experimental parts The Configuration View only shows the parts that are needed and used in a specific product analogous to the specific list of parts that are used in a particular model of car After you select a configuration in the main menu the Configuration View shows only
360. ry with new releases of the industry standard library without affecting the content that you have created in your own plug ins 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 104 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer There are three types of work products artefacts outcomes and deliverables Library 2 Boge eo pi_my_new_plug_in BA Method Content a Content Packages A cp_my_new_content cS Roles 8 Work New amp Artifact F Guidar 24 Deli bl Emi First Cont New Method Plugin Nerasie amp Second C gt L Standard Ca 2 Discipline 2 Domains a8 Work Pro 9 E Role Sets Tools Custom Cate Refresh Processes e 3 Capability Patterns a Delivery Processes t Configurations 5 Outcome An artefact is a tangible work product that is consumed produced or modified by one or more tasks Artefacts may be composed of other artefacts An outcome is an intangible work product that may be a result or state It may also be used to describe work products that are not formally defined A deliverable is a collection of work products usually artefacts used to define typical or recommended content in the form of work products packaged for delivery 5 5 Guidance Elements In addition to roles tasks and work p
361. s Contribution precedes Replacement Contribution associations are resolved first and then replacement is performed afterward The evaluation of contribution and replacement is performed in serial order in the specialisation hierarchy Exceptions All replacing associations are many to many except for the following association m Work Products can only be assigned to a single Domain If the replacing Work Product is assigned to a Domain the relationship from the base is ignored There is no exception when replacing a Domain element For more information about the associations for each element type see Associations Impacted by Variability 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 170 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Add a replace association 1 On the Description tab use the Content Variability section to make an element replace another element 2 Select Replaces as the Variability type and select the base element that this element will replace Note that the base element must be the same type of element as the replacing element Related topics Method Content Variability Associations Impacted by Variability Browsing Variability Relationships Contributes Variability Extends Variability Extends and Replaces Var
362. s and guidance This schema supports the organisation of large amounts of descriptions for development methods and processes covering design and engineering disciplines such as enterprise architecture business transformation software development mechanical engineering and so on The diagram above shows how such method content elements are organised in tree browsers on the left These tree browsers provide different indexes of the available elements for rapid access The screen capture shows on the right an example of a task presentation This task presentation defines the task in terms of steps that need to be performed to achieve the task s purpose You can see that the task has various relationships such as relationships to performing roles as well as work products that serve as inputs and outputs to the task 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 30 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer In addition to roles tasks and work products EPF Composer supports the addition of guidance elements Guidance elements are supplementary free form documentation such as white papers concept descriptions guidelines templates examples and so on EPF Composer provides various form based editors to create new method content elements You can document your task
363. s for their successful use It may be comprised of estimation considerations and estimation metrics Practice Represents a proven way or strategy of doing work to achieve a goal that has a positive impact on the work product or process quality Practices are defined orthogonally to methods and processes They could summarise aspects that impact may different parts of a method or specific process Report A predefined template of a result that is generated on the basis of other work products as an output from some form of tool automation An example for a report would be a use case model survey that is generated by extracting diagram information from a graphical model and textual information from documents and combines these two types of information into a report Reusable Asset Provides a solution to a problem in a given context The asset may have a variability point which is a location in the asset that might have a value provided or customised by the asset consumer The asset has rules for usage that are the instructions describing how the asset should be used Roadmap Describes how a process is typically performed Processes can often be much easier understood by providing a walkthrough of a typical instance of the process In addition to making the process practitioner understand how the work in the process is being performed a roadmap provides additional information about how activities and tasks r
364. s Reserved Page 27 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Figure 20 Unified Process Phases Disciplines Busines s Mod eling Reqirement Analers amp Design Metho d implementstio rn Content Tesi Deeploynerit Condiguredion Change Mgmi Project Managerment Enironment Iterations Process The figure above shows and example of how this separation is depicted in the methodology called Unified Process The Method Content describing how development work is being performed is categorised by disciplines along the y axis of the diagram The work described in a Process is seen along the x axis representing the timeline This is the lifecycle of a development project It expresses when work will be performed The graph in the illustration represents an estimated workload for each discipline As you see for example one never stops working on requirements in Unified Process but there are certainly peak times in which most of the requirements elicitation and description work is performed There are also times at which a downward trend needs to be observed where fewer and fewer requirements changes have to be processed to end the project This avoids what is referred to as feature creep in which requirements work remains constant or even increases Hence a lifecycle pr
365. s and Delivery Processes The work may have a relatively small scope in which case it can be described as a capability pattern or may address a full project lifecycle in which case it can be described as a delivery process Capability patterns are used as building blocks to compose delivery processes they describe reusable clusters of activities in common process areas A delivery process describes a complete and integrated approach for performing a specific type of project A capability pattern does not relate to any specific phase or iteration of a development lifecycle and should not imply any In other words a pattern should be designed in a way that it is applicable anywhere in a delivery process thereby enabling its activities to be flexibly assigned to whatever phases there are in the delivery process to which it is being applied 5 10 4 Process and Default Configuration A method configuration must be specified for the process at its creation neither capability patterns nor delivery processes can be created without being anchored to a method configuration A method configuration defines a logical subset of a method library and contains the list of method plug ins used to generate a specific instance of process guidance The processes will be created or authored against the specified method configuration Your process can contain content from many different method plug ins not only from the method plug in which contains it Wh
366. s as the based on activity but might define its own additions To modify or enhance an extended activity its status will have to be changed either to Local Contribution to add supplementary local tasks to Local Replacement to replace the tasks or to Local Replacement and Deep Copy to create a copy of all linked elements With a Replaces variability relationship type the association provides a mechanism for an activity element to replace a base activity element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties To apply activity variability 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Delivery Processes or the Capability Pattern folder node and select the process that will be linked to other activities through a variability relationship 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Select your process authoring view by clicking the Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation or the Work Product Usage tab 5 Select the activity that you want to reference another already existing activity using the variability mechanism 195 A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties
367. s for specific text elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 201 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer To develop a work breakdown structure 1 Access the work breakdown structure editor by clicking the Work Breakdown Structure tab in a process editor Note A breakdown structure is created with breakdown elements Examples of breakdown elements are Iteration Phase Activity or Task Descriptor Iteration Phase Activity are activity types and each type can be transformed into another type Typically a process is created by defining its iterations and phases which are then further broken down into levels of activities Finally you can populate a work breakdown structure s activity with task descriptors The structure is not verified or imposed by application it is up the process designer to choose the appropriate process element type Phase Iteration Activity Task Descriptor or Milestone and to insert it at the appropriate place in the process hierarchy Right click the element either a Capability Pattern or Delivery Process to which you want to add structure and click New Child gt Activity to create the new activity If needed create more activities to set up your breakdown structure Activities in addition to pha
368. s types of guidance Essentially all relationships listed are directed from one of the other method elements to the guidance The one exception is the guidance type called practice where the direction of the relationship is from practice to other types of method elements Table 5 Guidance relationships Work Guidance type product Task Role Checklists X X X Concepts X X X 112 Guidance is a general term for supplemental information that can be added to most Method and Process elements Guidance elements can also be associated with other guidance elements 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 161 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Guidance type n Task Role Estimation Considerations X X Examples X X Guidelines X X X Practice X X X Reports X Reusable Asset X X X Supporting Materials X X X Templates X Term Definitions Tool Mentors X X White papers X X X Note Practice has a relationship to these elements not from them Term Definitions are a special type of guidance only used for Glossary items Related topics Guidance Elements 7 3 Rich Text Editor The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance
369. scriptors that are outside of the target delivery process default configuration When selecting No the descriptors that are not part of the target delivery process default configuration are not copied When selecting Yes the descriptors that are not part of the target delivery process default configuration will be copied over Related topics Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Extend Capability Patterns Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element Properties View 9 7 3 Extend Capability Patterns If an activity or a Capability Pattern is extended into a target process or activity its method content elements retain a connection to the original capability pattern Extended capability pattern elements cannot be deleted or modified and appear as read only in green italic text Iteration phase and activity are three types of activity and a process is a sequence of these activities and the copying capability pattern procedure can be used to extend any activity not only capability patterns Extend creates an Extends variability relationship type to the original activity To extend a capability pattern 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Delivery Processes or t
370. se Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer order Task Steps Select a step and click Up or Down to change its order Steps gt Review the requirements to be tested gt Identify relevant Test Cases gt Outline the Test Cases gt Contributing Step 1 gt Identify test data needs gt Share and evaluate the Test Cases Contributing Step 2 8 Save the new task by closing the editor panel 9 Switch to the Browsing perspective Make sure that you are using my basic configuration 10 Expand Disciplines gt Test Click the Create Test Cases task The content panel shows a preview of the generated page Look at the steps to see how your new material was contributed You should see the text that you included in the contributing task displayed in the Create Test Cases task 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 71 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Task Create Test Cases Develop the test cases and test data for the requirernents to be tested Le Contributing Brief Description text Disciplines Test Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections Purpose Relationships Main Description Expand All Steps Collapse All Ste
371. selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Click the Work Breakdown Structure tab and select the activity to be modelled by the diagram by right clicking the item 713 You can create process diagrams to illustrate the relationships between processes When you publish a method Web site you can choose whether or not to include these diagrams 214 Activity detail diagrams show the tasks to be performed as part of an activity that is associated with a particular role These diagrams also show mandatory input and output work products for each task Activity detail diagrams are suitable for activities that consist of only child tasks You can create activity detail diagrams by using the Diagram editor and you can include diagrams that are created by other applications 215 You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 220 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 5 Select Diagrams gt Open Activity Diagram from the pop up menu You can also specify your own diagram image to use for this diagram by selecting Diagrams gt User Defined Diagrams E my first delive
372. sented by this icon 7 Double click on one of the tasks listed there The task editor is displayed on the right of the screen There are separate editors for the different types of content that you can create in a library Each editor has a series of tabs and a number of form elements on each tab You can find out more about these in the Create Method Content tutorial 8 Click the Preview tab A preview of an HTML page is displayed This is what the selected element will look like in a published Web site 9 Use the configuration selection menu to select the publish openup configuration publish openup m 10 Switch to the Browsing perspective The Configuration view is now displayed The Configuration view always has the same structure but the content changes based on the configuration currently selected 11 Expand the Disciplines folder until you get to tasks and click on a task The HTML preview of the selected item is shown on the right of the screen 12 Switch configurations The current configuration is displayed in the selection box below the main menu bar Select a configuration from the drop down list You will see the Configuration view refresh when you do this 13 Switch back to the Authoring perspective Expand the process gt openup gt base plug in then the Processes folder then the Capability Patterns folder then Phase Iteration Templates 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved
373. ses and iterations can be nested inside each other according to how each relates in the hierarchy s Library t D my first delivery_precess amp My Phig in Presentation Name I Predecess Model Info Type Plan Rep Mult Method Content Gh my ont Se Cee 7 aN ER gt E i Phase i Capability Patterns Add fram Method Contesit Reration a Mmy_capability_peores Apply Pattern amp Activity My_New_Capabair Defauh Synchronization from Method Content 3 Task Descriptor i Delivery Processes Custom Synchromization Milestone 3 my_delivery_process my_fiest_delivery_pra Configurations my_new_config my_second_config 1S Processes Suppress Update Suppression from Base Right click the activity and click Show Properties View Complete the information under the Documentation tab for the activity This information appears in the published Web page for the activity Review the list of tasks in the Configuration view to see which tasks are available Select a task to add to the breakdown structure and then drag it on top of the activity to which you want it to belong The task is added as a task descriptor to that activity If the Properties view for the task is not displayed select the task in the work breakdown structure editor right click and click Show Properties View Click the Documentation tab and complete the information required under this tab This information appears in the published Web page f
374. shed or not To select diagrams not to be published 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 Expand the folder node in the Library view for Processes and the Capability Patterns or Delivery Processes node and select the process that contains the activity with the diagram for which you want to change the publishing options 3 Open the process editor by double clicking the process or by right clicking it and selecting Edit from the pop up menu 4 Select your process authoring view by clicking the Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation or the Work Product Usage tab 5 Select the activity element that has a diagram that you do not want to publish and selecting Diagrams gt Publishing Options R My pes fi ta Prosesilelion Narn Minit To n Tram Type Plan Mull Opli a DM ae few Child kl SEE Add from Method Content SE Requirements Apply Patter ee u 3 Pan cour Mariane Metalic ot PON iI 6 z dali ae Rain Default Synchronization From Method Content iy a Elaboration Iteration 1 Oastorm Synchronization rat amp Construction Suppress o Update Suppression from Base Desciption Work Breakdown Sugur Properties ec Delivery Process My DP 14 General Genera Dacumentation Provideg Roll Up Gi Nari Dianranis E Open Adivily Diagram Viork Rallis Present ali bapend Aa htc x j 9 op Monti Collapse All kL Open Work Product Dependence Diara Teom Ro up eee E P blishinig Opticis i Work Pro
375. show Colour blind persons can enable this option to show the changes in differences with different characters in the line number ruler vertical ruler Default is off 12 2 5 Accessibility Features EPF Composer is based on Eclipse and offers several accessibility features which are part of the Eclipse development platform Those features are summarised as below User interface elements compatible with assistive technology are rendered using Microsoft Active Accessibility MSAA APIs All features can be operated using the keyboard instead of the mouse Screen reader software such as Freedom Scientific s JAWS can be used to hear what is displayed on the screen Voice recognition software such as IBM ViaVoice can be used to enter data and to navigate the user interface Screen can be magnified in the graphical views Fonts and colours defined by Eclipse can be set using the Window menu and selecting Preferences 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 267 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Note Accessibility features mentioned in this document apply to the Windows operating system Accessibility of Published Configurations All content in the method library is accessible Published configurations based on this
376. sidered mandatory and should not be removed from the process Multiple Occurrences If this is checked true when the process is instantiated as a project or other process it is expected that there will be multiple occurrences of this element If this is not checked false there should only be a single occurrence of this element when the process is instantiated Planned If this is checked true the element will be included in an export to a project management tool If this is not checked false it will not be included in an export Suppressed If this is checked true the element will not appear in a published process This is usually used to modify a capability pattern included in a process This is not checked false as default The following elements can be set for task descriptors and activities Event Driven If this is checked true the task or activity will be initiated when a particular event occurs If this is not checked false the task or activity will be initiated based on other tasks in the process Ongoing If this is checked true the task or activity is continuous If this is not checked false the task or activity has a clear start and finish in the process Repeatable If this is checked true the task or activity can iterate when the process is instantiated If this is not checked false the task or activity will only occur once in the process Dependency Field You can add one or more dependencies for
377. sks that they perform the work products that are used and produced by those tasks and supporting guidance Method content elements provide step by step explanations describing how specific development goals are achieved independently of the placement of these steps within a process lifecycle Processes take these method elements and relate them into semi ordered sequences that are customised to specific types of projects The four method content elements are Tasks Roles Work Products Guidance A Process Engineer authors these elements defines the relationships between them and then categorises them For example a software development project that develops an application from scratch performs development tasks such as Develop Vision or Use Case Design similar to a project that extends an existing software system However the two projects perform the tasks at different points in time and with a different emphasis that is they perform the steps of these tasks at different points of time and perhaps apply individual variations and additions Method content elements are contained within method Content Packages that in turn are contained within Method Plug ins In order to separate your own content from any original industry standard library content you should always create new method content in a method plug in that you produce Creating method content in a method plug in of your own also you to update your standard libra
378. ssociations Impacted by Variability Browsing Variability Relationships Contributes Variability 17 18 You can use the graphical display to navigate to any of the variability elements A contributing element adds to the base element Contributes provides a way for elements to contribute their properties into their base element without directly changing any of its existing properties such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 111 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Replaces Variability Extends Variability Extends and Replaces Variability Category Variability Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse 5 8 Method Content Categories The EPF Composer allows you to categorise your content based on a set of predefined categories called standard categories You can for example categorise your tasks into development disciplines or your work products into domains You can also create your own categorisation sche
379. st a Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer File Edit Search Configuration Window Help a Select a configuration lives fg GP Pe z 1 Project f Method Library 4 Method Plug in 1 Method Configuration Other 3 Name the new configuration my_configuration 4 Click the Plug in and Package Selection tab In the list of plug ins check my_plug in which you created in the Create Method Content tutorial This method plug in has OpenUp as a base and references parts of its content and has elements that extend and replace base content If you do not have this method plug in complete the Create Method Content tutorial before continuing 5 When you select my_p ug in some errors and warnings are displayed in the Problems view If the Problems view is not shown click on Windows on the main toolbar then Other and select Problems To fix these problems click the Fix errors and warnings button 6 This tutorial contains a brief summary of key concepts followed by ten exercises 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 95 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Bz my_configuration 23 u Configuration my_configuration i v Configuration Content Select the method plug ins content packages an
380. stead In addition the application creates the following folders C Documents and Settings User EPF layout C Documents and Settings User EPF workspace 150 These folders contain files that keep track of application changes performed by the user You can change the location of these files by creating a folder elsewhere for example under the epf composer folder and by changing the epf ini file The second line in the epf ini file has the text user home EPF workspace 150 Change the part before the 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 10 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer mention of workspace 150 to the path folder you have created for example to D epf composer Startup workspace 150 By now the application and your files are all to be found under the ep composer folder That makes the application portable and easy to backup 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 11 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 2 Method Content Download and Installation 2 1 Introduction You have multiple options to work with the EPF to create your own pr
381. such as in an additive fashion When the contribution is resolved during publication or by using the Browsing perspective the base element is logically replaced with an element that combines the attributes and associations of the contributing element with the base element 1 Extends associations provide a mechanism for method plug ins to reuse elements from a base plug in through a kind of inheritance Attribute values and associations are inherited from the based on element to the extending element The result is that the extending element has the same properties as the based on element but might define its own additions 197 The Replaces variability association provides a mechanism for an element to replace a base element without directly changing any of the base element s existing properties 98 You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 207 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 6 Inthe Properties view under the General tab select the Variability drop down list and select Contributes Extends or Replaces or leave the default Not H sd applicable A nvy_firs
382. t Diamond gt Pentagon View Be A Zoom Hexagon Octagon 29 se a Shadow Rectangle a bis i pi Rounded Rectangle TE eee RRAIN _ 3D Rectangle WI Reset Diagram Layout 5 Cylinder A Show Properties View f In the menu toolbar click Diagram to have access to multiple sets of functionality 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 228 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer a Eclipse Process Framework Co File Edit Diagrarg Search Configuration Wi wiy A Font _ amp Fill Color gt jak Library J Line Color r mett Line Style prad proo i Select All gt amp publi Arrange All b at s Align gt Order gt ji i Auto Size Make Same Size b Filters b n o View r my_ Zoom b SAMa 4s Diara 9 When you modify a diagram a symbol is displayed left to the name of the diagram tab indicating that it needs to be saved There are four ways to save it Close the diagram tool and click Yes in response to the question about saving the changes m Click one of the disk icons all or current in the toolbar Use the shortcut C rl s m Click File gt Save Related topics Process Authoring Overview Method Configurations Overview Create Capability Patterns C
383. t element or parent s parent and so forth until you reach the top level in green meaning the top parent of the extended activity topenupdifeeyde Presentation Name I Predecess Model Info Type Plan 3 amp OpenUP Lifecycle 0 Delivery I 1 Inception Phase 1 Phase ra Inception Iteration 1 n extends ince Tleralion 7 2 Litecyde Objectives Milestone 17 2 Milestone a M Lfaboration Phase 18 17 1 Phase w Flaboration Tteration 1 n 19 extends slab Tteration a Litecyde Architecture Milestone 48 19 Milestone w amp amp Construction Phase 49 48 18 Phase rd s Construction Iteration 1 n 50 extends rons Tteration a Initial Operational Capability Milestone 71 50 Milestone e i 8 Transition Phase 72 71 49 Phase w amp Transition Iteration 1 n 73 extends trans Tteration z EX Alan and Manage Iteration 7a evtonde Ala Aidh T Plan Iteration New Sibling r T Manage Meration Local Contribution X S Assess Results Local Replacement W Develop Solution Increment Local Replacement and Deep Copy j s E Test Solution Sucine EB Ongoing Tasks aaa ee b Product Release Milestone reget kas Tasks 2 i Update Suppression from Base 2 Right click the top level of the extended activity and click Local Contribution The activity becomes local and appears in black Do the same with all parent elements from the top to the bottom until you reach the activity you
384. t in a method configuration as it appears in a published Web site To browse and preview method content in the Authoring Perspective 1 Click Open Perspective and select Authoring The Authoring perspective opens with the Library View and Configuration View on the left and the Content view on the right When a method element is selected the appropriate editor opens in the right panel To explore the contents in both the Library view and Configuration view expand the different content packages and method plug ins down to their method elements Double click an element to open it in the editor Click the Preview tab at the bottom of the content editor to preview the content of any selected element Note The Preview page in the content editor does not resolve content variability relationships If you are extending contributing to or replacing a base content item you can only see the result of this in the Configuration view in the Browsing perspective For more information about content variability see Method Content Variability To browse and preview method content in the Browsing Perspective 1 Click Open Perspective and select Browsing The Browsing perspective opens with the Configuration view on the left and the Content view on the right Select a Method configuration from the configuration pull down list in the toolbar The content of the method configuration is displayed in the Content view as it is display
385. t_delivery_process Presentation Name l Predecess Model Info Type Pian Rep Mult Ong Eve Opti E my_first_daivery_process 0 Delivery Process L my_first_iteration i Iteration E z a 0 my irt phase 2 Phase 4 J 5 u O my_thst_activey 3 Activity 4 mre firt tak dese Task Descriptor Deseiption Work Breakdown Structore Team Allocation Work Product Usage Constlidated View Properties Delivery Process my_first_delivery_process General Information General Do on Provide general information about this delivery process Guidance Name my firt debvery_process Work Rollup Presentation name my_first_detvery_process Team Rollup Optional Multiple Coourmrenges Planned Work Product Rollup Event Driven Ongoing C Repestable Index Presentation Name Depende Add Dependency Model information Variatility type Gantributes fase 7 Select the referenced base activity by clicking Select The Select Dialog Activities pops up and you can select the base activity with which you want to create a variability relationship Your new process iteration phase or activity will now reuse the previously created activities in a new context Related topics Process Management 4 Method Content Variability Category Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element P
386. te a new iteration in the Elaboration phase Right click the Elaboration phase and select New Child gt Iteration Call the iteration Elaboration Iteration 1 8 Inthe Configurations view expand Processes gt Capability Patterns gt Phase Iteration Templates 9 Drag and drop the Inception Phase Iteration capability pattern onto the Elaboration Iteration 1 iteration in My DP 10 Select Extend 11 Expand the Inception Phase Iteration capability pattern that you added to the task descriptor level Note that the task names are displayed in green italic This indicates that the task descriptor is in a part of a process defined elsewhere in a capability pattern Subsequent changes to the capability pattern will be propagated to your process The Properties view shows the task details but they cannot be edited 12 Right click a task descriptor in the extended capability pattern and select Suppress The task descriptor is disabled and the text colour becomes gray The task descriptor will not appear in the published version of the delivery process nor will it be included in an export of the process FS My DP 53 7a Presentation Name Index P M Type Planned Repea Multipl R My DP 0 Delivery Pro El gog amp Inception 1 Phase O 0O BB Requirements 2 Activity El o Eg Develop Technical Vision 3 Task Descrip C D E E Identify and Outline Requirements 4 Task Descrip Lil E g L Detail System Wide Requiremen
387. techniques and have overlapping skills but may be responsible for performing certain tasks and creating certain work products Role sets can be organised using role set groupings Role set grouping Role sets can be categorised into role set groupings For example different methods might define similar role sets which need to be distinguished from each other on a global scale Step A step is a part of the overall work described for a task The collection of steps defined for a task represents all the work that should be considered to achieve the overall goal of the task Not all steps are necessarily performed each time a task is invoked in a process Steps are generally unordered and can be performed in any order Supporting material Supporting material is a generic type of guidance containing information not specifically covered by the other guidance types Synchronisation Synchronisation is a mechanism whereby changes to information in method elements can be automatically updated in related process elements For example if a name of a method content element is changed the new name will be displayed in all processes that use that method element There are two types of synchronisation Custom synchronisation at the activity level will update descriptors in activities by bringing in task descriptor s associations Default synchronisation at the activity level will update activities by bringing in task descriptor s associati
388. tegories Specity name and default configuration for the capability pattern to be crested CS Custom Categories Qa Processes Name miy_sew_capability_pettern 4a Capability Pattemis ia My First Process Package te Delivery Processes i My Second Process Package 44 Configurations kd my_new_oonfig Default Configuration my_new_confia Pa OK Cancel More than one configuration can be added using the capability pattern or delivery process editors One configuration must be selected as the default it must be a super set of all the other configurations already added But then why add the others When activating a process editor the default behaviour is to prompt for the process default method configuration if a different configuration is selected or if none is selected Switch Configuration x gt Do you want to switch the current configuration to the default configuration publish openup assodated with the selected process Remember my decision yes No This default behaviour can be changed through Windows gt Preferences gt Method gt Authoring gt Process Editor and selecting the option of Always or Never switching to the process default configuration As already indicated method configurations are used also to specify working sets of content and processes defining which elements are published or not published on the Web site 5 10 5 Process Packages Right
389. tegory you can modify the sequence of the items in the category by setting the order manually in alphabetical order reverse alphabetical order or by element type This affects the sequence of the items in the Library view the Configuration View and in a published Web site if the custom category is included as a view in a configuration a To manually sort the elements in a category select Manual from the Sort Type box Click Order and specify the order by using the Up and Down buttons b To automatically sort the elements in a category choose an automatic order from the Sort Type combo box Tip You can also select an automatic order from the Sort Type combo box when you click Order 7 To save your new custom category click File gt Save or close the editor and click Yes when prompted to save the changes You can now use the custom category as a view in a published configuration To use the custom category as a navigation view 8 Inthe Library view of the Authoring Perspective double click the configuration in the configurations folder to which you want to add a view 158 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8
390. tely replaces all attributes and Extends and outgoing association instances of the base variability element with new Replaces values and instances or removes all values or association instances if the replacing element does not define any extends and replaces variability only replaces the values that have been redefined and leaves all other values of the base element as is Related topics Method Content Variability Associations Impacted by Variability Method Content Categories Custom Categories Assign Category Modify Category Assignment Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 194 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Capability Patterns Reuse 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 195 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 9 Create Processes Contents Create Capability Patterns Create Delivery Processes Develop Work Breakdown Structures Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Activity Variabilit
391. tent elements assigned to that custom category Custom categories can also be displayed with the elements that they are categorising For example you could create a custom category that logically organises content that is related to your development organisation department such as a Testing category that groups together all roles work products tasks and guidance elements that are related to testing You can organise custom categories in a hierarchy which means that you can create a category as a child of another category Child categories can be referenced by more than one parent category Related topics Method Configurations 5 9 Method Configurations A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and method packages in a method library A method configuration defines a working set of packages within the method library that limits your view to a subset of the library Elements that comprise the selected configuration are displayed in the Configuration view Method configurations are 21 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 114 of 275
392. tent pages include an additional section called Process Usage that lists all occurrences of the method content elements in all processes of the published configuration This provides a quick overview to see in which processes and where in these processes method content elements have been used When this option is selected you have also the option Show all indirect green occurrences in extended patterns which determines how many process occurrences are shown for a method content element If the option is not checked then only direct usage of the elements is shown recognisable by using a black font for these elements in the process editor s breakdown structure If the option is checked then also all indirect occurrences are shown Indirect usage means that the element has not been applied directly to the process but indirectly by applying a capability pattern that had this element applied recognisable by using a green font for these elements in the process editor s breakdown structure Default tab for activity pages Published activity pages comprise four tabs This option allows selecting which of these tabs is presented first by default 13 To get to the next set of publishing options click Next 14 Enter destination Directory Decide in which directory the published site will be created 15 Select options for Website format Static web site This option creates static HTML pages in the directory sele
393. ter is mandatory index target index The name of the target in which the file defined by the parameter indexresultfile is written This parameter is mandatory if the parameter indexresultfile is set keywordtarget keyword_t The name of the target in which the file defined by the parameter keywordresultfile is written This parameter is mandatory if the parameter keywordresultfile is set indexheight 25 When the parameter indexresultfile is set a frameset is created This parameter defines the height in pixels of the frame in which the indexresultfile is shown This parameter is mandatory if the parameter indexresultfile is set headerfile keywordpreamble txt This parameter makes it possible for the user to customise this application as much as possible This parameter is the name of a file that serves as the header for the file defined by the parameter keywordresultfile The value of this parameter is either a relative path from where this program is executed or an absolute path This parameter is mandatory If you use a cascading styles sheet file to control the layout of the index then the headerfile must contain a link to that cascading style sheet file footerfile keywordpostambl e txt This parameter makes it possible for the user to customise this application as much as possible This parameter is the name of a file that serves as the footer for the file defined by the
394. test_discipline assign Contributes to test_discipline in core default cat_def base practice tech continuous_integration assign IE Nicrinlines lt m Brief Description This discipline explains how to design and implement a technical solution that conforms to the architecture and supports the requirements 21 Close the editor panel and save your changes 22 From the Library view double click to open one of the elements that you assigned to the new custom category Observe how the custom category is reflected in the Categories tab 4 5 4 Create a Method Configuration The goal of this exercise is to create a new method configuration Later in this tutorial we will publish this configuration To create a method configuration 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring perspective 2 There are three ways to create a new method configuration 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 94 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer a Click File gt New gt Method Configuration b In the Library view right click the Configurations folder and click New gt Method Configuration c You can also click the Down Arrow of the New icon Ci in the toolbar and select Method Configuration from the drop down li
395. th the option to continue or not To avoid needing to merge the files later click No and stop editing that element FwoON gt 5 Inthe Editor window edit the element content An asterisk is next to the element s name at the top of the editor window while it is being edited This 57 You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel 258 You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined 5 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 252 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer indicates that the version cached in memory is out of synch with the local file system 6 Click File gt Save The copy in the local file system is updated and the asterisk is cleared B Team Synch 7 Switch to the Team Synchronising perspective ste Sl 8 Ensure that the element that you edited in Step 5 is listed with other PET files 9 Select the top level folder for yo
396. th tree navigators one called Library and the other called Configuration If the Library panel isn t visible you should use the Window menu in the main toolbar and select Show View and then select Library This control lets you show or hide the view panels 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 37 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 1 Explore the Library view Note the Library view is only available while you are using the Authoring perspective It is not accessible while you are in the Browsing perspective The Library view shows you all method content in the current library The highest level library content unit is a Method Plug in when you are using the Flat presentation When you are using the Hierarchical presentation the highest level content unit is the logical grouping or set of Method Plug ins called logical package The logical packages are sets of plug ins created simply by using dots in their names The structure of the names and dots of the plug ins creates the logical groupings of the method plug ins that are displayed in hierarchical presentations To switch between Flat and Hierarchical presentations click the down arrow v in the Library tool bar and select Method Plug in Presentation then choose Flat or Hierarchical 2
397. the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Use the tree browser to choose the location for the new element 3 Right click the parent element and select New Choose the appropriate element type 4 Inthe Send an Edit Notification to CVS window click Yes to lock plugin xmi for further editing If the file is currently being edited by another user a window opens with the option to continue or not Click No so that you do not need to merge the files later Exit the operation 5 Enter content for the new element in the editor window While an element is being edited an asterisk is next to the element s name at the top of the editor window This indicates that the version cached in memory is out of synch with the local file system 6 Click File gt Save The copy in the local file system is updated and the asterisk is cleared j ici 0 Team Synche 7 Switch to the Team Synchronising perspective 8 Make sure that the element created in Step 5 is listed with plugin xmi and any other dependent files 9 Select the top level folder for your project and click Commit Related topics Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS Add a Method Plug In to CVS Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 6 Delete Elements under CVS You can us
398. the activity process iteration phase or activity where you want the copy to go To select multiple activities in a capability pattern press the Ctrl or Shift keys while you select 7 Inthe menu that opens click Deep Copy 8 A second prompt asks Do you want to copy all descriptors 204 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 205 You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 206 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 211 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Attention This second prompt only appears when a capability pattern or activity contains de
399. the top of the screen click my_configuration The items in the configuration view change 12 Switch to the Browsing perspective Explore the content in the Configuration view You should see the content that you created in your method plug ins and some inherited content 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 96 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 4 5 5 Publish a Custom Method Configuration The goal of this exercise is to publish a method configuration To publish a custom method configuration 1 Use the Configuration menu in the main tool bar and click Publish 2 In the list of configurations click my basic configuration and then click Next 3 Step through the Publish wizard accepting the defaults and publish the configuration It will take a few minutes to generate the Web site Assuming that you have the correct Java environment the browser applet should launch so that you can view the published Web site Accept any security warnings when the applet launches Note The published site has a richer organisation and layout compared to the simpler view of the configuration content shown in the Configuration view 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 97 of 275 This program and the accompanying
400. thod Plug in Presentation gt Flat t Hierarchical 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 125 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer You can choose to display the physical names the creation of a plug in creates a file with the same name or to show presentation names by switching the name display There are two ways of switching the way the name is displayed Click the a button in the Library view m Click the Library view drop down menu triangle or down arrow and select Show Presentation Names Related topics Method Library Authoring Perspective Browsing Perspective Method Configurations 6 5 Configuration View The Configuration View displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views After you select a method configuration from the Configuration box in the toolbar the Configuration view displays the content from the selected configuration The configuration view does not show any physical folders these are only shown in the Lib
401. tion Use this page to set the default path for the method library You can also set the following preferences Method gt Authoring Discard unresolved references off by default The option can help you clean up your library and remove errors that are reported in the Problems view However you should analyse why these references were broken and be clear 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 263 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Setting Description about your intention to remove them before you select this option Use new Extends semantics off by default If the option is not selected Extends variability works as described in Method Content Variability If the option is selected semantic rules for Extends are available as specified in the OMG finalised SPEM 2 0 specification Software and Systems Process Engineering Metamodel See http www omg org issues spem2 ftf open html Issue1 1284 and http www omg org spec SPEM 2 0 for details History size for previous path choices default is 10 Enable method library validation off by default This option enables some additional commands in the EPF Composer user interface for example the Validate button in the Library view s toolbar as well
402. tion If this option is selected all links are converted to plain text instead and no broken link symbol is used 11 Select options for Diagrams Publish activity detail diagrams that have not been manually created When this option is selected EPF Composer publishes an Activity Detail Diagram for every activity It creates these diagrams and publishes them with a default auto layout If the option is cleared then only the Activity Detail Diagrams are published that a user has manually created in the Process editor and saved with a custom layout Publish activity diagrams for unmodified activity extensions By default activities that are extensions of other activities are not published with an Activity Diagram but only the Breakdown Structure If this option is selected however extending activities are published with the diagram of their base activities if these extending activities do not define their own sub elements that is are pure pattern applications without providing its own modifications If these activities define their own elements you should create a local activity diagram for the extending activity that will then be published 12 Select options for Layout Show relationship sub folders in navigation trees If this option is selected it will publish elements for instance tasks with its related elements such as input and output work products in separate sub folders If cleared it will publish related elements as sub e
403. tion Window Help a Pa Select a configuration lovee ag GP eS 301 Project F F Method Library h Method Plug in 11 Method Configuration Other 3 The New Method Library dialogue box pops up and asks you for the folder where you want to create the new method library Notice that the library by itself does not have a name There is a description field you may fill out Create a new folder or use an already existing one Select the folder and click on Finish 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 129 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer New Method Library DEJ Create a new method library r a Specify a path and description for the new method library A Path D epf composer Method Libraries Library1 Browse Description Finish Cancel When a new method library is created it has initially no method plug ins and an empty method Configurations S Eclipse Process Fr amework Composer D File Edit Search Configuration Window Help a Select a configuration lim i iO Pie imauiba dE Configurations he Since all method content is contained in method plug ins the next step after the creating of a new method library is either importing an existing method plug
404. tivating a process editor the default behaviour is to prompt for the process default method configuration if a different configuration is selected or if none is selected You use the method configuration editor to create and modify method configurations In this editor you select which method plug ins content packages and categories of elements you want to include to or exclude from the method library into the method configuration The selections that you make restrict the scope of the content that you use as a basis for defining your process These selections also determine the content of the published Web site Method configurations are assigned names and are saved so that they can be reused later In addition to creating new method configurations as described below you can also simply copy and paste a configuration by right clicking the method configuration that you want to copy and afterwards right clicking the top level Configurations folder and clicking Paste You will get a complete copy of the configuration with a new name that you can modify for your needs To create a new method configuration 1 Make sure that you are in the Authoring Perspective 2 You can begin the method plug in creation process in one of three ways a Click File gt New gt Method Configuration fe Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer Ble Edit Search Configuration Window Help New gt i Method Library Fs Open gt lt gt Method P
405. tribute is optional but if you intend to use cascading style sheets you must specify at least a defaultstyle Use the file defined by the parameter headerfile to import the styles You can choose not to use cascading style sheets CSS In that case you use the parameter levelfont to control format See the parameter levelfont This parameter defines which font that will be used to generate the different keywords If you have defined any stylesheets this parameter will be left unnoticed If you have not specified any stylesheets this parameter must to be used The syntax keywordlevel reservedname fontname fontstyle fontsiz defaultfont Arial e keywordlevel reservedname is either the level of the levelfont levelfont Bold 2 keyword or one of the reserved names defaultfont or headlinefont fontname is mapped to the FACE 1 Times Italic 1 attribute of the HTML FONT attribute fontstyle is mapped to the lt B gt or lt I gt tags Possible values are Bold Italic and Plain fontsize is mapped to the SIZE attribute of the HTML FONT attribute The attribute is optional but if you intend to use Font definition you have to specify at least a defaultfont Related topics Publish Configuration 7 6 2 Change Feedback Addresses The e mail address used for feedback in a published configuration can be changed by editing the Feedback URL field in the Select publishing options window
406. tructure of the view is defined as a Custom Category a In the Configuration editor click the Views tab b Click Add View c If needed click the plus sign to expand the Custom Categories folder and select the category that you want to use as your view Click the sign to expand your chosen category and view its contents Press and hold the Ctrl key to select multiple views d Click OK The window closes and the views that you selected are added to the configuration 9 Select the view that you want to display as your method configuration s start up view and click Make Default The start up view is the first view shown when a published configuration opens for the first time 10 Click Order to open a window so that you can change the order of how the views are displayed in the published site 11 Click File gt Save 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 141 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Related topics Method Configurations Copy a Method Configuration Method Content Package Create a Method Plug in 6 12 Copy a Method Configuration It is easier to copy an existing configuration rather than to create a new one To copy a method configuration 1 Make sure that you are working in the Authoring
407. tructure of the view is defined as a custom category a In the Configuration Editor click the Views tab 4 A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and method packages in a method library Tt is easier to copy an existing configuration rather than to create a new one 8 A method content package is a container for method elements Elements are organised in method packages to structure a large scale of method content and processes and to define a mechanism for reuse All content is organised in method plug ins With method plug ins and method packages you can organise your content at a level of granularity that meets your needs for authoring and reusing content 5 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 142 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer b Click Add View c If needed click the sign to expand the Custom Categories folder and select the category that you want to use
408. ts 5 Task Descrip O D O 4 Plan and Manage Iteration 6 Capability P O o E Plan Iteration 7 Task Descrip m CL O Ug Manage Iteration 8 Task Descrip o g g L Assess Results 9 Task Descrip E g g amp Elaboration 10 Phase El El amp Elaboration Iteration 1 11 Iteration o e Inception Phase Iteration 12 e Capability P gog g D BS Initiate Project 13 Activity E E 82 pian and Manage Iteration 16 Activity ww a BB sdentity and Refine Requirements 20 13 e Activity M E T 2 Agree on Technical Approach 25 13 e Activity o oO lt gt Description Work Breakdown Structure Team Allocation Work Product Usage Consolidated view 4 4 5 Create a Process Diagram The goal of this exercise is to use diagram features To create a process diagram 1 Switch to Authoring perspective 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 86 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Open the My DP delivery process that you have been working on 3 Inthe Work Breakdown Structure tab right click My DP and select Diagrams gt Open Activity Diagram Click OK to create a new diagram The diagram editor should open showing the top level activities phases 4 Expand the palette on the right of the diagram view if not already expand
409. tures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element Properties View Activity Variability Types Rich Text Editor 9 4 Develop Team Allocation Structures In the Team Allocation view you can create a process by defining which roles participate in activities and find responsible work products and tasks from there You can also review the roles in a process that has been created by adding tasks or work products to the process Before you create a team allocation structure ensure the configuration selected in the tool bar is the same as the configuration that you selected as the default configuration for your process To develop a team allocation structure 1 In the process editor click the Team Allocation tab 181 While editing a process you can use the Process Element Properties View to edit all details for a single element in the process If you click in any row in a process display you will see the full details of the process element in the row in the Properties View 182 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 183 process describes how a particular piece of work should be done The work may hav
410. ty Patterns for more details Related topics Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Deep Copy Capability Patterns Extend Capability Patterns Develop Work Breakdown Structures You can select the process and open the process editor from both the Library view and the Configuration view when the default configuration for the process has been selected 203 The Configuration view displays content elements in a library that is filtered by a method configuration A method configuration is a subset of the method library content The view displays a preview of the content elements that will be published or exported for this configuration and allows you to preview the published site s navigation views 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 210 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Develop Team Allocation Structures Develop Work Product Usage Structures Process Element Properties View 9 7 2 Deep Copy Capability Patterns Deep copy is the mechanism that you can use to copy an activity or a Capability Pattern to a target process or activity with all its descriptors and assignments The resulting copy and its method content elements are disconnected from the original capability pattern The
411. ty pattern or parts into the activity process iteration phase or activity where you want the copy to go To select multiple activities in a capability pattern press the Ctrl or Shift keys while you select 7 Inthe menu that opens click Extend The capability pattern is extended and its name is displayed in green which indicates it is part of a process defined elsewhere Alternative procedure 1 Or in the process view right click an activity and click Apply Pattern gt Extend The Select Dialog Processes window opens 2 Drill down into the process tree until you locate the capability pattern that you want to extend 3 Select the pattern and click OK The Select Dialog Processes window closes and the capability pattern is applied Suppress If you do not want a specific activity or task in the capability pattern to be included in your process you can suppress it The activity or task will not appear in the published process nor will it be exported to a project planning tool 1 To suppress a process element right click the element and click Suppress in the pop up menu The element is disabled in the process view 2 If you later want to reverse the action you can right click the element and click Reveal in the pop up menu Related topics Activity Variability Create Capability Patterns Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Local Contribution Local Replacement
412. u can use the rich text editor for this d See the results on the Preview tab 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 55 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Task My Design User Interface To produce a design of the user interface that can be used to validate the L gt new layout Disciplines Development Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections Relationships Roles Primary Performer Additional Performers e My Ul Designer Inputs Mandatory Optional e Use Case Model e None Outputs e My Navigation Map Back to top Expand All Steps Collapse All Steps Describe the characteristics of related users Identify the primary user interface elements New Step 4 Remove a step a Return to the Steps tab b Select the step that you want to remove c Click Delete d See the results on the Preview tab 5 Move a step up the list a Return to the Steps tab b Select the step that you want to move up c Click Up d See the results on the Preview tab 6 Move a step down the list a Return to the Steps tab 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 56 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this d
413. ug ins will have this schema 5 2 Method Library All method elements are stored in a method library The method library contains 1 method plug ins and 2 method configurations 1 Method Plug ins All method content is contained in method plug ins and all method content must be organised into one or multiple method plug ins 2 Method Configurations A method library also has one or more method configurations that filter the library and provide smaller working sets of library content for the end user A method configuration is a selection of method plug ins and their content Method configurations are used for a creating processes and b for defining which elements will be published Processes A method configuration defines a logical subset of a method library and when a process is created a method configuration must be specified for the process A method configuration is the list of method plug ins used to generate a specific instance of process guidance The process will be created or authored against the specified method configuration Published The method configurations limit the view to a subset of the library i e the selections made in the method configuration determine the content of the published Web site To illustrate the relationship between plug ins and configurations it can be argued that a method library is analogous to a warehouse full of parts that are used to assemble various products Method configuratio
414. ur project and click Commit Related topics Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to cushion Bookmark not defined Delete Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 8 Move elements under CVS You can use CVS to move a method or process element in the library The version control system makes changes to the appropriate files Before moving a method element make sure that the element and any files that depend on it are committed These steps apply to elements such as roles tasks work products guidance categories configurations capability patterns and delivery processes To move method and process elements under CVS Open the Authoring perspective m scales Use the tree browser to choose the element that you want to move Right click the element and select Move In the Send an Edit Notification to CVS window click Yes to lock the needed files If a file is currently being edited by another user a window opens with the option to continue or not To avoid needing to merge the files later click No and stop moving that element FON 5 Inthe Move window select the destination for the element Click OK 6 If you move the element to a different plug in the window in Step 4 opens and prompts you to send a notification to the CVS server Click Yes 69 You can add a method library to CVS so that
415. ure Team Allocation or the Work Product Usage tab 5 In the Configuration View expand the Processes and Capability Patterns folders node and select a capability pattern or its parts that you want to copy into an activity in a target process Note that you select and drag the parts you want to copy from the Configuration view and not the Library view 6 With the mouse drag the capability pattern or parts into the activity process iteration phase or activity where you want the copy to go To select multiple activities in a capability pattern press the Ctrl or Shift keys while you select 7 Inthe menu that opens click Copy The capability pattern is copied and its name is displayed in black and it is available for you to edit Alternative procedure 1 In one of the process views right click an activity and click Apply Pattern gt Copy The Select Dialog Processes window opens 2 Drill down into the process tree until you locate the capability pattern that you want to copy 3 Select the pattern and click OK The Select Dialog Processes window closes and the capability pattern is applied Suppress If you do not want a specific activity or task in the capability pattern to be included in your process you could suppress it The feature is not very useful when copying a capability pattern since the activity or the task can be deleted from the copy which is more natural than suppressing it See Extending Capabili
416. utorial you should be able to do the following Create a new method plug in Create a new content package Create a new work product Create a new role Create a new task Work with steps Create basic guidance Add a method plug in to a method configuration Time required The estimated time to complete this tutorial is about 90 minutes Prerequisites You should make a back up copy of your library before continuing In the following exercises we will make minor changes to the library content that you may not want to preserve Lessons in this module Concepts This page describes the basic concepts that are required to complete this tutorial Create a Method Plug in The goal of this exercise is to create a new method plug in Create a Content Package The goal of this exercise is to create a method content package for our new plug in Create a Work Product The goal of this exercise is to create a new work product Create a Role The goal of this exercise is to create a new role in my_plug in Create a Task The goal of this exercise is to create a new task and then relate it to the other elements that we created in previous exercises Work with Steps The goal of this exercise is to use the Step Editor which is part of the Task Editor Create Guidance Elements The goal of this exercise is to create a guidance element Apply Guidance 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved
417. ved Page 7 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Click on Download and yet another web page comes up http www eclipse org epf downloads tool epf1 5 0_downloads php Scroll down the page until you see the section Download Figure 3 EPF Downloads Expand the downloaded zip file gt Change to epf composer folder and start the program named epf exe EPF 1 5 0 4 New Win32 Download 78 MB 09 Oct 2009 EPF 1 5 0 4 New Linux GTK Download 78 MB 09 Oct 2009 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 4 New Win32 Download 518 kB 09 Oct 2009 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 4 New Linuv GTK Download 518 kB 09 Oct 2009 EPF 1 5 0 3 Win32 Download 78 MB 16 July 2009 EPF 1 5 0 3 Linuv GTK Download 78 MB 16 July 2009 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 3 Win32 Download 518 kB 16 July 2009 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 3 Linu GTK Download 518 kB 16 July 2009 EPF 1 5 0 2 Win32 Download 78 MB 18 Dec 2008 EPF 1 5 0 2 Linu GTK Download 78 MB 18 Dec 2008 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 2 Win32 Download 518 kB 18 Dec 2008 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 2 Linu GTK Download 518 kB 18 Dec 2008 EPF 1 5 0 1 Win32 Download 78 MB 28 Oct 2008 EPF 1 5 0 1 Linu GTK Download 78 MB 28 Oct 2008 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 1 Win32 Download 518 kB 28 Oct 2008 EPF Richtext Feature 1 5 0 1 Linu GTK Download 518 kB 28 Oct 2008
418. vide information about how to create a work product how to perform a task how to perform a role and so on Guidance can also be attached to the standard method content categories Disciplines domains work product kinds role sets and tools Guidance elements can also be attached to the following process elements Processes Capability Patterns and Delivery Processes Activity Descriptors Iterations Phases and Activities Task Descriptors Since the guidance elements can applied to either method or process elements they straddle both sides of the equation aligning method content with their use in processes On one hand they can provide additional free form information about how to deliver method content and on the other hand guidance elements such as checklists examples or roadmaps can provide exemplary walkthroughs of a process A task is an assignable unit of work Every task is assigned to a specific role The granularity of a task is generally a few hours to a few days and usually affects one or a small number of work products 6 A role defines a set of related skills competencies and responsibilities of an individual or individuals 97 A work product is a term that is used to describe task inputs and outputs 8 Guidance provides information about how to perform a role how to create a work product how to perform your task and so on 9 The core content of activities is task descriptors and the steps o
419. vities and tasks relate to each other over 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 107 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Term Description time Used as a category for other types of guidance that are not specifically Supporting Material defined elsewhere It can be related to all kinds of content elements including other guidance elements Provides for a work product a predefined table of contents sections packages headings a standardised format in addition to descriptions Template about how the sections and packages are supposed to be used and completed Templates cannot only be provided for documents but also for conceptual models or physical data stores Terms define concepts used to enhance the Glossary A term definition is not directly related to content elements but its relationship is being derived when the term is used in the content elements description text Term Definition Shows how to use a specific tool to accomplish some piece of work Tool Mentor in the context of or independently from a task or activity A concept guidance that has been externally reviewed or published White Paper and can be read and understood in isolation of other content elements and guidance
420. vity has all of its children suppressed the primary and additional performers of all of its suppressed children are assigned to it This activity exports as a Microsoft Project task because it has no children The following elements are not exported m Work products Suppressed activities Tasks Microsoft Project sets the start and end dates for the project You need to adjust them after the export has completed by using Microsoft Project To export to Microsoft Project 1 Click File and click t Export Click E Microsoft Project and click Next Select a capability pattern or delivery process to export Click Next AON Select the method configuration and export options that will be used to export the selected process Selected process Method configuration Publish the process Web site Publish the entire method configuration Publish content that is only relevant to the selected process Export only breakdown elements that are planned 5 Select the publishing options that will be used to publish the Web site for the exported process Click Next 6 Enter a Name and Directory for the exported file Use Browse to navigate to the exported folder 7 Click Finish to begin the export process 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 241 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution
421. w 193 The rich text editor provides text formatting functions that alter the appearance of published content The CSS style sheet in a Web site controls the appearance of text at a global level but the rich text editor can override those controls for specific text elements 4 Method content variability allows elements in one content package to modify or reuse elements in other content packages without directly modifying the original content Variability provides a mechanism for making changes to the published Web site while keeping the components separate and optional 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 206 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Contributes Variability Extends Variability Replaces Variability With a Contributes variability relationship type the customisation can introduce changes relevant to the new target activity without affecting the base activity The base activity is logically replaced with an activity that combines the contributing activity with the base activity With an Extends variability relationship type the customisation can reuse a base activity through a kind of inheritance to which it adds its own activity elements The result is that the extending activity has the same propertie
422. w multiple content authors to work in parallel 24 You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined 241 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 2 You can use CVS to track changes that happen to the content and relationships of method and process elements You can use CVS to track who changed what when and why 4 You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 248 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to CysETo Bookmark not defined Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS Move Elements under CVS 11 1 3 Add New Libraries to CVS You can add a method library to CVS so that you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel If your CVS server is not pre populated with a method library follow these steps to create a new library and add it to version
423. within my_plug in add your method content elements such as Roles Artefacts Tasks and Guidance into the custom category If you do not have this package add content from another area in the library Remember You can select multiple items by using Shift or Control key Add the development_discipline discipline which is under Disciplines in the core default cat_def base method plug in Click OK This tutorial contains a brief summary of key concepts followed by ten exercises 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 93 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer S Select Dialog Most common Method Element Type Disciplines Name patterns matching names will be shown Patterns are separated by comma where any string any character S J core default cat_def base E Disciplines architecture _discipline B requirements _discipline test_discipline practice mgmt iterative_dev assign E Disciplines E Bl project_management_discipline assign Contributes to project_management_discipline in cor practice mgmt two_level_project_planning assign Disciplines project_management_discipline assign Contributes to project_management_discipline in cor B A practice tech concurrent_testing assign 3 Disciplines
424. ws such as walkthroughs or inspections Outlines key ideas associated with basic principles underlying the Concept referenced item Concepts normally address more general topics than guidelines and span across several work product tasks or activities s Examples provide a model a representative form or a typical example Example of a completed work product Provides additional detail about how to perform a particular task or grouping of tasks or that provides additional details rules and recommendations about work products and their properties Guideline Among others a guideline can include details about best practices and different approaches for doing work about how to use particular types of work products information about different subtypes and variants of the work product and how they evolve throughout a lifecycle 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 155 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Term Description discussions about skills the performing roles should acquire or improve upon and measurements for progress and maturity Estimation Considerations a Provides sizing measures or standards for sizing the work effort associated with performing a particular piece of work and instruction
425. xercise is to create a delivery process using core method content directly In process authoring the definitions of the method content elements are not included directly in the work breakdown structure but local references termed descriptors are created which refer back to the content elements in the method library Descriptors contain the references to the original method elements as well as additional information that is relevant to the local process Descriptors provide a mechanism whereby relationships are defined in core method content authoring such as roles associated with a task input and output and work products that can be defined or changed locally within the process To create a delivery process 1 Make sure that you are using the Authoring perspective 2 Inthe Library view create a new delivery process under my_plug in by right clicking Delivery Processes then clicking New gt Delivery Process 3 When you create a process you are asked to provide a name and select a default configuration to be used with the process Use the name My DP and select my basic contiguration If you have not created this configuration select publish openup 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 82 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer E N
426. xisting Method Library An existing method library is opened by selecting File gt Open gt Method Library E Eclipse Process Framework Composer D epf composer File Edit Search Configuration Window Help New gt 75 hali 6 A SP i S Ogen gt Method Library Then select the folder with the existing method library content for example the ept_work_practices folder or any other folder with existing method library content Open Method Library GR Open Method Library 5 oi Specify a path containing a method library Bye path D epf composer epf_ work practices Ta Browse Einish Caneel The Copy Library dialogue window then pops up with the message The library you are opening is a default library supplied with the composer Figure 26 Copy Library Copy Library x The library you are opening is a default library supplied with the composer We highly recommend that you make a working copy of this library for editing Enter a location and library name for the new library and click Copy to make a working copy Click Skip to continue editing the default library in the current location __ The editing capability for the default library is restricted by the access __ permissions enforced by your platforms D epf composer epf_jvork_practices Browse 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 128 of 275
427. y add or delete elements to an extended capability pattern If you need to modify the local elements of an extended activity you can apply Local Replacement and Deep Copy This creates a copy of all dynamically linked elements that you need to main separately To copy and replace elements of an activity in an extended capability pattern 1 Locate the activity s parent element or parent s parent and so forth until you reach the top level in green meaning the top parent of the extended activity 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 215 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer i openup_lifeeycle ie Presentation Name I Predecess Model Info Type Plan 3 amp OpenUP Litecycle 0 Delivery I a M Inception Phase 1 Phase 4 Inception Iteration 1 n extends ince Tleralion z Litecyde Objectives Milestone Tae Milestone a M Llaboration Phase 18 17 1 Phase 4 s Flaboration Tteration 1n 19 extends elah Iteration amp Litecyde Architecture Milestone 48 19 Milestone z i A Construction Phase 49 48 18 Phase X Construction Iteration 1 n 50 extends rons Tteration a Initial Operational Capability Milestone 71 50 Milestone Zij f Transition Phase 72 71 49 Phase w Transition Iteration 1 n
428. y Types Capability Patterns Reuse Copy Capability Patterns Deep Copy Capability Patterns Extend Capability Patterns Process Element Properties View Apply Process to Method Synchronisation m Working with Process Diagrams 9 1 Create Capability Patterns A Capability Pattern is a special process that describes a reusable cluster of activities in a general and common process area that provides a consistent development approach to common problems Capability patterns articulate process knowledge for a key area of interest such as a discipline and can be used by process practitioners either directly or as a guide A capability pattern does not relate to any specific phase or iteration of a development lifecycle and should not imply any In other words a pattern should be designed in a way that it is applicable anywhere in a delivery process thereby enabling its activities to be flexibly assigned to whatever phases there are in the delivery process to which it is being applied Capability patterns can be used as building blocks to assemble delivery processes or larger capability patterns You do not need to develop your delivery process from scratch you can reuse existing capability patterns or even capability pattern parts The reuse can consist of copying or extending already existing capability patterns Typically but not necessarily capability patterns have the scope of one discipline
429. y clicking the Guidance tab and then selecting from a list of possible guidance elements Shorten the list by searching for my 6 Use the Preview tab to generate a view of the page as it will look in a published site My Create Physical Appearance Checklist should be displayed at the bottom of the page in a section labelled More Information 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 57 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer Task My Prototype User Interface To prototype the system s user interface in an attempt to validate the user interface design against the functional and usability requirements Disciplines Development Expand All Sections Collapse All Sections Relationships Roles Primary Performer Additional Performers e My Ul Designer Inputs Mandatory Optional e My Navigation Map e None Outputs e My Ul Prototype Back to top Expand All Steps Collapse All Steps Design the user interface prototype Implement the user interface prototype Back to top More Information Checklists e My Create Physical Appearance Checklist Back to top Description Steps Roles Work Products Guidance Categories Preview 4 2 9 Apply Guidance The goal of this exercise is to perform some simple management tas
430. y reusing capability patterns and method elements Create custom categories for use as views in a configuration Create and modify configurations Publish configurations or processes Process Author The Process Author s goal is to produce a delivery process for their projects by reusing method elements The Process Author uses the tool occasionally as project needs dictate typically supporting one or more likely several projects by specifying the 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 268 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer processes to be followed The Process Author uses the process authoring and configuration publishing functionality of this tool to Create plug ins Create reusable capability patterns by reusing method elements Create delivery processes by reusing capability patterns and method elements Create custom categories for use as views in a configuration Create and modify configurations Publish configurations or processes Process Configurator The Process Configurator s goal is to produce a delivery process for their projects by rapidly leveraging ready made plug ins The Process Configurator uses this tool occasionally as project needs dictate typically supporting one or several projects by spec
431. you can control the version of various files in your library and allow multiple content authors to work in parallel 61 You can add method and process elements to CVS so that you can control changes to each element as its content is written and its relationships are defined 6 You can use CVS to ensure that when you delete a method or process element the dependent files are appropriately version controlled 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 253 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 7 Click File gt Save 20 Team S 8 Switch to the Team Synchronizing perspective wast ania 9 Make sure that the element that you moved in Step 5 is listed with the other dependent files 10 Select the top level folder for your project and click Commit Related topics Install and Configure CVS Create a New View with CVS Add New Libraries to CVS Add a Method Plug In to CVS Add Elements to CysEror Bookmark not defined Delete Elements under CVS Edit Elements under CVS 11 2 Version Control Reference Contents Version Control for Specific Files Common Actions Impact on Specific Files 11 2 1 Version Control for Specific Files The following table describes the function of specific files and th
432. you selected are in the Responsible for panel Note Selected elements in an Add Remove section display the element name and the path to that element the plug in name and the package name Click the Preview tab to view the newly created role 10 Save your work 8 Mar 10 lt Copyright 2010 Bjorn Tuft All Rights Reserved Page 51 of 275 This program and the accompanying materials are made available under the Eclipse Public License V1 0 which accompanies this distribution EPF Eclipse Process Framework Composer 4 2 6 Create a Task The goal of this exercise is to create a new task and then relate it to the other elements that we created in previous exercises To create a task 1 In the Library view under my_content_package right click Tasks and select New gt Task The Description tab is selected in the task editor Use the following attributes to create the new task Name my _design_user_interface Presentation name My Design User Interface Brief description To produce a design of the user interface that can be used to validate the new layout Click the Steps tab and click Add A new step named New Step is created Change the name of this step to Describe the characteristics of related users Click Add again and add a second step named Identify the primary user interface elements Note that you could add additional details about these steps in the Description
433. yperlink 7 3 1 Add References or Hyperlinks You can add three types of references or hyperlinks to your content text References to other elements in the method library Reference to files imported into the method library References to external text resources that reside outside the method library Text fields that support hyperlinks have a Rich Text Editor icon Eil next to the text field s label Click the symbol to expand the field into a full text editor To insert a hyperlink to another element in the method library into a text field locate the element that you want to create a link to in the Library or Configuration view and drag it into the appropriate text field You can also drag a method element into an unexpanded text field that supports hyperlinks with the same result You can use the Add Link function in the rich text editor to add links that are references to other method elements or links to files or Web pages This gives you more options for how your links are displayed 1 In the text editor position the cursor where you want to insert the link and in the tool bar click Add Link 2 The Add Link window opens 2 Click Browse to locate and select the element you want to create a link to There are several options for creating links to other content elements with each option offering a different way for displaying the link s name Method element The link displays the element name Method with type prefix The l

EPP Installation Tutorial User Manual 20100308 v1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents